LESSONS  IN 


PHYSICAL  EDUCATION 


FOR 


ELEMENTARY  GRADES 


Published  by  the 

STATE  SUPERINTENDENT  OF  PUBLIC  INSTRUCTION 

RALEIGH,  N.  C. 


Library  of  the 
University  of  North  Carolina 

Endowed  by  the  Dialectic  and  Philan- 
thropic Societies 


M 


Educational  Publication  No.  66 


Division  of  Publication  No.  13 


LESSONS  IN 


FOR 


ELEMENTARY  GRADES 


Published  by  the 

STATE  SUPERINTENDENT  OF  PUBLIC  INSTRUCTION 

RALEIGH,  N.  C. 


LESSONS  IN 

PHYSICAL  EDUCATION- 
FOB 

GEADES  I  TO  VII 

Arranged  by 

Mary  Channing  Coleman 
Anne  M.  Campbell 

The  North  Carolina  College  for  Women 


Outdoor    Gymnasium,    The    North    Carolina    College    for    Women. 


<0 


Outdoor  Gymnasium,  The  North  Carolina  College  for  Women. 


<k. 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2011  with  funding  from 

Ensuring  Democracy  through  Digital  Access  (NC-LSTA) 


http://www.archive.org/details/lessonsinphysica1923cole 


INTRODUCTION 


This  course  in  Physical  Education  for  the  elementary  schools  of 
the  State  has  been  prepared  by  Miss  Mary  Charming  Coleman  and  Miss 
Anne  M.  Campbell  of  the  Department  of  Health  of  the  Worth  Carolina 
College  for  Women.  We  are  deeply  grateful  to  both  Miss  Coleman  and 
Miss  Campbell  for  their  generous  services  to  the  Physical  Education 
Division  of  the  North  Carolina  Education  Association,  and  to  Miss 
Alice  Bivins  and  Miss  Matilda  Morlock  of  the  Public  School  Music 
Department  of  the  North  Carolina  College  for  Women. 

There  has  been  a  long  felt  need  for  a  course  in  physical  education 
for  the  elementary  schools  of  the  State.  This  need  has  grown  more 
urgent  each  year.  The  purpose,  therefore,  of  this  course  is  to  give  the 
teachers  games  and  physical  exercises  which  they  may  use  in  their 
schoolrooms  and  on  the  playgrounds,  for  physical  education  should  be 
a  part  of  the  school  life  of  every  child.  It  is  believed  that  the  teachers 
who  play  the  games  and  take  part  in  the  other  forms  of  physical 
activity  in  this  course  with  enthusiasm,  will  be  able  to  carry  on  work 
in  physical  training  which  will  bring  most  gratifying  results,  both  in  the 
physical  improvement  of  their  pupils  and  in  the  general  toning-up  of 
the  entire  school. 

The  compilers  of  this  bulletin  have  attempted  to  arrange  material 
suitable  for  use  in  ordinary  school  conditions,  where  the  lessons  must 
be  given  in  the  classroom  or  on  the  playground.  Many  of  the  games 
and  folk-dances  described  have  been  collected  from  the  students  of  the 
North  Carolina  College  for  Women,  and  represent  traditional  material 
handed  on  from  our  Anglo-Saxon  ancestors. 


State  Superintendent  of  Public  Instruction. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS 


Page 

Introduction    5 

The  Course  in   Physical   Education 7 

Outlines  by  Grades 12 

Grade  I  12 

Grade  II  29 

Grade  III   51 

Grade   IV    64 

Grade   V    72 

Grade   VI    8 

Grade   VII    9 

Relief  Drills  for  Grades  III  to  VII  10 

Athletic   Contests    10( 

School  Festivals   11 

References    1 121 


orgai 
Rcrc 

I  a 


PHYSICAL  EDUCATION 

FOR 

ELEMENTARY  GRADES 


A  program  of  Health  Education  for  the  Elementary  Schools  may  be 
more  clearly  understood  if  the  teacher  will  give  serious  attention  (A)  to 
the  aims  and  objectives  in  Physical  Education,  (B)  to  the  time  required 
for  this  subject,  (0)  to  the  activities  represented  in  this  broader  curri- 
culum, (D)  to  a  typical  weekly  program,  (E)  to  training  necessary  to  secure 
correct  posture,  (F)  methods  of  teaching  and  (G)  explanation  of  types 
of  exercises.     These  several  divisions  are  treated  briefly   as  follows : 

A.    AIMS  AND  OBJECTIVES  IN  PHYSICAL  EDUCATION 

1.  Temporary  Relief  from  Enforced  Quiet  : 

"Round  shoulders"  and  contracted  chests  are  rarely  found  in  children 
of  the  pre-school  age.  It  is  one  of  the  gravest  indictments  against  our  educa- 
tional systems  that  these  defects  are  known  as  "school-room  deformities," 
appearing  at  about  the  third  year  of  school  life.  Even  those  of  us  who 
have  efficient  bodies  and  who  habitually  stand  and  sit  well,  will  slump 
when  we  are  fatigued ;  and  when  children's  backs  and  limbs  are  cramped 
from  prolonged  sitting,  we  find  the  familiar  bad  postures  that  lead  to 
round  shoulders  and  lateral  curvatures.  The  daily  gymnastic  lesson,  to- 
gether with  the  three  minute  open  window  activity  period,  placed  at  the 
hour  when  relief  is  most  needed,  will  go  far  to  obviate  this  danger. 

2.  Improved   Neuro-musctjxar   Coordination  : 

The  inter-action  of  nerve  and  muscle  is  often  compared  to  the  working  of 
a  telephone  system ;  an  efficient  "central"  and  well-cared-for  lines  result 
in  quick  and  accurate  connection.  Games  and  gymnastics  help  bring  about 
prompt  response  to  stimulus.  "The  training  a  boy  receives  in  deciding  where  to 
throw  the  ball  in  a  game,  or  whether  now  is  the  time  to  run  or  to  play 
safe,  is  of  far  more  direct  value  in  his  social,  economic  and  intellectual 
education  than  much  of  his  other  training,"  says  a  prominent  educator. 

3.  Improved  Functioning  of  Vital  Organs  : 

This  is  an  age  of  the  popular  slogan ;  "a  clean  tooth  never  decays,"  is 
one  familiar  to  the  reader  of  the  popular  magazines.  Equally  true,  but 
not  so  well-known,  is  the  maxim  "a  well-ventilated  lung  does  not  contract 
tuberculosis."  The  tubercle  bacillus  usually  begins  his  deadly  work  in  the 
apex  of  the  lung,  which  is  not  ventilated  in  ordinary  shallow  breathing, 
but  gets  well  aired  in  vigorous  exercise. 

Then  the  heart,  like  any  other  muscle  of  the  body,  can  only  be  kept  in 
good  tone  by  performing  a  certain  amount  of  work ;  and  the  digestive 
organs,  through  improved  circulation  and  through  efficient  secretion  and 
excretion,  are  likewise  aided  by  the  daily  lesson  in  Physical  Education. 

4.  Recreation — or   Re-creation,   roth   for  its   Immediate   and  Permanent 

Values. 


•3                                           Physical  Education 

B.    TIME    REQUIRED    FOR    PHYSICAL    EDUCATION    IN    ELEMENTARY 

SCHOOLS 

(1)  Two  three-minute  open  window  drills,  mid-morning  and  mid-after 

noon  daily. 

(2)  Twenty  to  twenty-five  minutes     for     daily     lesson.       Total     time 

weekly,   130  to  150  minutes. 

C.    ACTIVITIES    REPRESENTED    IN    PHYSICAL    EDUCATION 

CURRICULUM 

1.  Lessons  in  Hygiene ;  formation  of  health  habits  through  talks,  inspec- 
tions, health  clubs,  reports,  etc. 

2.  Gymnastic  lessons. 

3.  Plays  and  games. 

4.  Rhythmic  exercises  and  folk  dances. 

5.  Athletic  contests. 

D.    TYPICAL  WEEKLY   PROGRAM 

Monday 

TUESDAY 

Wednesday 

Thursday 

Friday 

Grade  II: 

Story  Play; 
Singing  Game 

Health  Lesson 

Story  Play 
Game 

Free  Play 

Rhythm 
Exercises 

Grade  V: 

Hygiene 
Lesson 

Gymnastics 
Games 

Badge  Tests 

Gymnastics 
Games 

Rhythm 
Exercises 

Grade  VII:  (Girls) 

Badge  Tests 

Gymnastics; 
Folk  Dance 

Health  Talk; 
Feet  and  Shoes 

Gymnastics ; 
Games 

Game  Contest 
Volley  Ball 

Grade  VII:  (Boys) 

Badge  Tests 

Gymnastics 
and  Stunts 

Health  Lesson; 
Feet  and  Shoes 

Gymnastics 
Games 

Game  Contest; 
End  Ball 

Total:     Five  20-minute  periods,  _     -       _. 

Two  three-minute  relief  periods  daily 

E.    TRAINING  CORRECT  POST 

Children  are  not  born  round-shouldered,  and  whe 
veloped,  it  is  due  to  more  than  carelessness  on  the  ps 
at  him  to  "hold  your  shoulders  back"  is  unjust,  an 
any  improvement.     The  most  frequent   causes   of  r 
accompanying  deformity,  hollow  back,  are  as  follows 

1.  Malnutrition,  its  consequences  of  weakness  an 
relaxed  "fatigue  position"  becomes  chronic. 

2.  Prolonged  sitting  position,  causing  cramp  and 

3.  Ill-fitting  school  desks  and  seats. 

4.  Improper  clothing ;   boys  often  have  pockets  s 

100  min.; 
...  30  min. 

130  min.  wee 

URE 

n  the  condi 
irt  of  the  ch 
d  will  never 
ound   should 

d  poor  muse 

fatigue. 

o  placed  th 

k 

tion  has  de- 

ild;  nagging 

accomplish 

ers  and  the 

le  tone ;  the 
at  they  can 

Elementary  Schools  9 

only  be  reached  by  a  slump ;  little  girls'  waists  are  often  so  cut  that  the 
weight  of  stockings  and  petticoats  pulls  the  shoulders  forward. 

5.  Unhygienic  daily  routine — insufficient  sleep,  lack  of  vigorous  play. 

6.  Defective  sight  or  hearing. 

The  first  step  in  the  correction  of  bad  posture  is  the  removal  of  the 
cause ;  then  exercises  are  given  to  stretch  the  contracted  cbest  tissues  and 
to  tighten  the  relaxed  muscles  of  shoulders,  head   and   abdomen. 

F.    METHODS  OF  TEACHING  GRADES  I  AND  II 

The  teaching  of  these  two  grades  is  largely  informal  and  imitative. 
The  teacher  should  enter  into  all  activities  with  the  class.  Her  directions 
should  be  simple  but  clear.  She  should  be  well  acquainted  with  her 
material  and  be  able  to  meet  all  possible  emergencies  that  may  arise. 
Commands  should  be  avoided  whenever  possible ;  suggestions  are  much 
better  with  smaller  children.  However,  they  should  learn  that  such  signals 
as  the  whistle  or  chords  on  the  piano  mean  a  definite  thing  and  response 
to  them  should  be  immediate. 

The  imagination  is  a  great  factor  in  teaching  Physical  Education  to  these 
children.  When  an  exercise  is  given,  invent  a  name  for  it.  Use  the  natural 
environment  and  interests  of  parents  and  children. 

If  the  children  like  a  game  or  dance  they  will  love  to  repeat  it.  It 
will  not  lose  its  value  through  repetition.  Variety,  however,  will  help  to 
keep  the  interest,  so,  even  though  the  children  may  ask  to  repeat  a  familiar 
game  or  dance,  do  not  let  it  wear  out  by  too  much  repetition.  Keep  all 
material  alive  and  thus  prevent  the  children  becoming  tired  of  any.  If 
you  permit  the  repetition  of  games  and  dances  they  should  show  an  im- 
provement in  execution. 

Physical  Education  in  the  first  and  second  grades  should  encourage 
alertness,  independent  action  and  ready  response  to  unexpected  directions. 
It  gives  elementary  training  and  sportsmanship  and  cooperation.  The  sense  of 
balance  and  rhythm  will  also  be  developed. 

Music  will  be  a  great  help  in  training  rhythmic  movements  and  dancing. 
For  rhythmic  training  the  children  should  be  taught : 

I.  Clapping  in  various  rhythms  : 

A.  Even — Clap-clap-clap. 

B.  Uneven — 

(1)  Clap-clap clap-clap 

(2)  Clap-clap — clap-clap-clap 

(3)  Any  other  variations  that  may  be  desired. 

II.  Marching  should  be  light  and  not  too  slow.  It  may  be  combined 
with  clapping  or  used  with  various  imitative  activities  such  as  blowing 
horns  and  beating  drums. 

III.  Skipping : 

Formations  depend  upon  the  available  space.     Lines  when  possible  should 
be  marked  on  the  floor.     Watch  for  correct  spacing  and  train  the  children 
to  get  in  the  proper  positions  as  quickly  as  possible. 
Remember  : 

1.     Do  not  be  too  serious. 


10  Physical  Education 

2.  Know  your  material. 

3.  Have  all  necessary  equipment,  balls,  etc. 

4.  Be  ready  to  meet  all  possible  emergencies  that  may  arise. 

5.  Choose  games  suitable  to  the  age  and  number  playing. 

6.  Be  able  to  adapt  your  material  by  using  more  than  one  ball  or  having 
more  than  one  child  "it." 

7.  If  a  game  does  not  "go"  or  you  do  not  "get  it  across"  learn  to  analyze 
and  find  out  the  difficulty  so  you  can  remedy  it. 

G.    EXPLANATION  OF  TYPES  OF  EXERCISES 

The  following  activities  are  included  in  the  Physical  Education   Course 
Story  Plays 
Games  and  Contests 

Rhythmic  Plays  and  Singing  Games  '  0 

Gymnastics 
Relief  Drills 
Athletic  Contests 
School  Festivals. 


Story  Plays.  Tnis  type  of  work  takes  the  form  of  a  story  which 
the  children  act  out.  Story  plays  may  be  used  to  correlate  with  the  dail 
occupations  and  activities  and  the  teacher  may  work  out  and  adapt  anj|«y] 
number  of  plays  of  her  own.  They  may  be  used  in  such  a  way  as  to  appea 
to  the  imagination  of  the  small  child  and  at  the  same  time  give  the  necessarj 
amount  of  exercise.  All  of  these  movements  should  be  large  and  free  ir 
order  to  be  of  hygienic  value  and  there  must  be  joy  and  interest  or  thej 
are  useless.  These  plays  are  an  essential  part  of  the  first  and  second  grades 
The  story  play  should  be  given  in  such  a  manner  that  the  imaginative 
side  of  the  child  is  alert.  The  suggestions  for  movements  should  comd 
from  the  children.  For  instance,  the  teacher  wishes  to  give  a  snow  pla 
through  the  deep  snow.  She  may  introduce  the  subject  by  saying.  "Let's  plaj 
that  it  snowed  all  last  night  and  the  snow  is  very,  very  deep.  Some  on< 
show  us  how  we  shall  have  to  walk  through  the  big  drifts."  Have  severa 
children  demonstrate  before  the  class.  Then  proceed  by  saying,  "Let's  all  d< 
it— go !" 

The  plays  follow  a  definite  order,  so  that  all  parts  of  the  body  may  b( 
exercised. 

Form  of  Story  Play  : 

Example 

Reaching  to  the  shelf  for  a  book. 

High  stepping  horse. 

Looking  up  in  the  trees. 

Mowing  the  grass. 

Chopping. . 

Jumping  in  place  to  get  the  feet  warm 

Blowing  on  the  fingers  to  get  them  warm 

Games  and  Contests.  The  play  of  children  is  a  joyous  and  spontaneoui 
activity  essential  to  health  and  development.  We  have  come  to  realiz< 
the  need  and  value  of  play  for  children,  and  teachers  are  urged  to  direc 


Movement 

1. 

Stretching. 

1. 

o 

Leg. 

2. 

3. 

Head. 

3. 

4. 

Arm. 

4. 

5. 

Trunk. 

5. 

6. 

Precipitant. 

6. 

7. 

Breathing. 

7. 

Fc 


Elementary  Schools  11 

and  guide  the  play  of  the  pupils  in  the  public  schools.  The  teacher  herself 
should  have  the  spirit  of  the  play  as  no  one  can  be  a  successful  leader  of  plays 
and  games  unless  she  has  an  understanding  of  and  a  love  for  games.  The 
teacher  should  know  a  large  number  of  games  and  when  one  is  not  going 
well,  she  should  have  several  others  she  can  bring  forth  on  the  instant. 
There  is  always  a  keen  interest  in  contests  and  the  point  is  to  keep  up 
!&|ithis  interest  and  through  it  develop  a  spirit  of  fairness  in  games.  No 
pains  should  be  spared  to  secure  fair  play  and  careful  and  correct  decisions. 

It  is  here  that  teachers  have  opportunity  for  training  in  conduct  and 
moral  principles.  Children  should  expect  fairness  and  should  wish  to  be 
perfectly  fair.  Some  games  require  judges  or  an  umpire  who  should  see 
Everything  that  happens  and  should  decide  all  questions. 

Rhythmic  Plays  and  Singing  Games.  The  object  in  rhythmic  plays  is 
to  develop  rhytfffii'  and  coordination.  Aside  from  the  hygienic  value,  and 
the  development  of  rhythm  and  grace,  they  provide  also  for  dramatic 
expression. 

Whenever  possible  these  plays  should  be  given  out  of  doors.  Where  there 
is  no  piano  or  victrola  available  the  children  may  supply  their  own  music 
by  singing,  or  part  may  hum  the  tune  or  clap  the  hands  lightly. 

Gymnastics.     This  work,  which  is  done  to  command,  is  known  as  formal 
ymnastics.     Its  object  is  threefold  : 


1.  The  educational  effect  of  quick  response  to  command. 

2.  The  corrective  value  of  training  in  neuro-muscular  control  and   good 
posture  habits,  through  insistence  upon  right  form  of  work. 

3.  The  hygienic  value   of  rapid   successive   contractions   of   large   groups 
of  muscles  followed  by  deepened  breathing  and  quickened  circulation. 


Relief  Drills.  These  are  brief  periods  of  physical  activity  given  for  mental 
and  physical  relaxation  several  times  each  day  or  whenever  needed  through- 
out the  day's  program.  Suggested  exercises  and  activities  are  given  on 
pages  46  and  105. 

*1     Athletic   Contests.     Sprints,   short  dashes,   relay   races  and  games   of  skill 

d° should  be  included  in  the  athletic  contests   for  elementary   school  children. 

For   a   list   of   standard   athletic   contests   suited   to   this    age   see   page  106. 

School  Festivals.  When  school  festivals  are  an  outgrowth  of  the  actual 
school  room  work  in  Music,  in  Physical  Education,  Art.  English,  History 
Or  Geography,  they  are  of  great  value  to  the  school.  Suggested  outlines  and 
detailed  descriptions  of  festivals  to  use  are  given  on  page  117. 

Books.     Valuable  reference  books  for  the  teacher  will  be  found  on  page  121. 


GRADE  I 

For  Explanation  of  Types  of  Exercises,  see  pages  10,  11. 

STORY    PLAYS 

I.  Picking  Apples: 

1.  Run  out  to  orchard.     (Run  around  1  or  2  rows.     Run  around  one  rov 

of  desks.) 

2.  Climb  fence.      (Climb  over  desks  or  chairs.) 

3.  Climb  ladder  into  tree.      (Reach  up  with  right  hand  and  right  foot 

alternate  knee   bending.) 

4.  Shake  down  apples. 

5.  Climb  down. 

6.  Pick  apples  off  ground. 

7.  Heavy  basket.     (Carry  home.) 
S.     Smell  supper  cooking. 

II.  Playing  in  Wind:  * 

1.  Skip  out  to  play. 

2.  Spread  arms  out  and  run  against  wind. 

3.  Weather  vane.     (Arms  shoulder  height,  turn  each  direction.) 

4.  Wind  mill.      (Arms  shoulder  height.     Large  arm  circles  like  wings  c 

windmill.) 

5.  Tree  swaying.      ( Stand  with  feet  apart ;  arms  curved  overhead ;  ben 

from  left  to  right.) 

6.  Jump  up  and  down  to  keep  warm. 

7.  All  out  of  breath.      (Deep  breathing.) 

III.  Fire  Engines  : 

1.  Every  other  child,   horse  and  driver.      (Take  hold  of  hands.     Horse 

gallop  and  drivers  lean  back.) 

2.  Climb  ladders  to  save  some  one — throw  things  out  window. 

3.  Squirt  hose  on  fire.     Hiss  water.     (Hose  hard  to  manage.     Brace  rigl' 

foot  forward,  knee  straight,   left  knee  bent.     Lean  backward  arrr 
out-stretched.     Play  hose  on  fire.     Change  feet.) 

4.  Chop  wall.     (Axe  overhead  and  into  wall.) 

5.  Drive  home.     (Those  that  drove  to  fire  are  horses  going  home.) 

6.  Tired.     (Deep  breathing.) 

IV.  Columbus  Discovers  America  : 

1.  Ships  sail  across  sea. 

2.  Climb  ladders  to  fix  sails. 

3.  Sight  land.      (Peer  under  hands.) 

4.  Sailors  hop  up  and  down  for  joy. 

5.  Climb  down  ladder  to  small  boats. 

6.  Row  ashore. 

7.  Cheer — Hip,  hip,  hooray. 


First  Grade  1^ 

V.  Putting  in  Coal  : 

1.  Drive  to  house.     Two  children  then  take  hands  to  make  team.     Third 

child  drives.  Heavy  hauling. 

2.  Stoop  down  low  to  open  window. 

3.  Shovel    coal.      (Sidewise    motion.) 

4.  Pull  up  chute.     (Stoop  low  and  pull  up  3  times.) 

5.  Gallop  home,  wagon  light,  fast  going. 

6.  Smell  supper  cooking. 

VI.  Gathering  Wood  for  Fire: 

1.  Walk  out  into  woods  to  get  wood. 

2.  Climb  fence. 

3.  Chop  down  trees. 

4.  Sawing  wood  with  brother. 

5.  Hand   over  fence  to   brother. 

6.  Heavy.     Haul  home. 

7.  Split  into  kindling. 

8.  Carry  up  stairs. 

9.  Light  fire.     Blow  out  match. 

VII.  How  Animals  Get  Ready  for  Winter: 

1.  Squirrel  gathers  nuts  and  buries  them ;   jump   on   toes,   get  nuts,   put 

in  mouth,  stoop  down,  dig  hole,  put  in  ground. 

2.  Birds  fly  south ;  arms  shoulder  high ;  fly  around  room. 

3.  Bear — looks  for   cave.      Walk    heavily   arouud    room,    sway    from    side 

to  side,  crawl  into  own  seat. 

4.  Pony  being  shod.     Hammer  horse  shoes.     Every  other  child  pony  and 

blacksmith. 

5.  Pony  gallops.     Gallop  around  room. 

6.  Snake  wiggles  slowly  into  hole.     Slide  down  into  ser.t. 

7.  Deer  in  north  woods  making  tracks  in  snow.     Run  zigzag  around  room. 

VIII.  Jack  O'Lantern  : 

1.  Children    drive    to    field    for    pumpkins.      (Run    around    room    driving 

horses.) 

2.  Stoop    and    lift    up    very    heavy   pumpkins.       (Place    them    in    wagon, 

one  at  a  time.) 

3.  Drive  home. 

4.  Make  a  Jack  o'lantern.      (Cut  off  top,  dig  out  seeds  and  throw  them 

away.    Make  eyes,  nose  and  mouth.) 

5.  Run  out  with  Jack  o'lantern  to  frighten  people. 

6.  Reach  up  high  to  window.     Hear  some  one  coming,  so  stoop  suddenly. 

Repeat.      Try    another    window    farther    up    the    street.      Window 
much  higher ;  can  barely  reach  it. 

7.  Run  home. 

8.  All  out  of  breath  from  hurrying;  take  deep  breaths. 

IX.  Thanksgiving  Pies  : 

1.  Skip  to  store  to  buy  provisions. 

2.  Reach  up  to  counter  to  give  cashier  money. 

3.  Skip  home  with  basket. 


14  Physical  Education 

4.  Make  pies,  shake  flour,  stir,  roll  out  crusts,  put  iu  oven. 

5.  Run  out  doors  while  pies  are  baking. 

6.  Take  pies   out   of  oven. 

7.  Burn  fingers ;  blow  on  them. 

8.  Smell  pies. 

X.  Snow  Man  : 

1.  Snow   falling   outside.      (Reach    up   and    bring   arms    lightly    down    to 

floor,  bending  at  waist.) 

2.  Pulling  on   rubber  boots.      (Bend  knee  up  and   stretch  arms.     As  you 

stretch  knee,  bend  arms,  pulling  on  boot.) 

3.  Walking  through   snow    (very   deep).      (High   knee   bending   upward.) 

4.  Make   snow    man.      (Stoop    down,    gather   up   snow    and    roll   to   front 

of  room  body  of  snow  man.) 

5.  Run  back   and  roll  another  to  make  head.      (When  complete  have  a 

child    come    forward    for    snow    man    and    stand    with    arms    raised 
sideways.) 

6.  Make  snowball,    (kneel  on  one  knee,  gather  up  snow   and   press  hard 

together. ) 

7.  Throw  at  man.      (As  balls  hit  head,  child  drops  head  forward.     Then 

one  arm  and  then  the  other.     Finally  legs  are  hit  and  child  falls 
to  floor  in  a  heap.) 

8.  Breathing  and  blowing  on  fingers  to  get  them  warm. 

XI.  Christmas.     Santa  Claus'  Visit  : 

1.  Santa  puts  on  his  coat,  cap,  mittens  and  boots. 

2.  Looks  at  sky. 

3.  Jumps  in  sleigh. 

4.  Pulls   on  reins. 

5.  Jumps  from  sleigh,  and  warms  hands,  feet  and  arms.      (Run  in  place, 

swing  arms  and  rub  hands.) 

6.  Goes   down   chimney.      (Bend   knees    slowly   as   if   disappearing.) 

7.  Place  presents  in  stockings  and  on  floor  and  table. 

8.  Climb  up  rope  through  chimney. 

9.  Breathe  after  hard  work. 


XII.     Christmas   Toys : 

1.  Jack-in-the-box.      (Children  stand  in  aisles.     Teacher  makes  downwarc 

motion  with  hands  as  if  closing  fid  of  box  and  all  children  stoop 
down ;  raise  hand  quickly  and  children  jump  to  standing  position 
They  may  make  a  noise  to  represent  the  squeak  of  "Jack-in-the 
box.") 

2.  Beating  drum   (marching). 

3.  Shooting  toy  gun.     (Kneel,  point  gun  and  pull  trigger,  saying,  "Bang!") 

4.  Trains  of  cars.     (Each  row  forms  a  train.    The  first  child  places  hands! 

on  hips.  Others  place  their  hands  on  shoulders  of  ones  in  front 
Short  steps  making  "choo-choo"  of  engine.) 


XI 


First  Grade  15 

5.  Jumping  jacks.     (Teacher  makes  a  motion  as  if  pulling  a  string  and 

children  jump  into  air  with  feet  apart  and  arms  out  at  sides, 
returning  to  position.) 

6.  Blow  up  new  foot  ball.      (Breathing.) 

7.  Suggest  other  toys. 

XIII.     Eskimo  Life  : 

1.  Represent    snow    storm.       (Stretch    arms    overhead    and    lower    them 

slowly.) 

2.  Blow  flakes  to  represent  wind. 

3.  Walk  through  deep  snow  to  site  of  new  house. 

4.  Cut  blocks  of  snow  and  ice. 

5.  Lift   and  carry  blocks.      (Pile  them  up  to  make  walls.      Stamp  down 

first  layer  of  blocks.) 

6.  Leave  opening  for  door.     (Stoop  and  look  into  new  home.) 

7.  Get  spear  and  run  out  on  ice. 

8.  Spear  some  fish  for  supper. 

9.  Build  fire  and  cook  supper. 

IV.     Circus  : 

1.  Odd   and   even   rows  face  each   other — row   one   facing  row   two,   row 

three  facing  row  four,  etc.  Odd  rows  toss  peanuts  to  even  rows, 
which  are  elephants.  Elephants  form  trunks  by  clasping  hands  in 
front  and  as  peanuts  are  thrown  they  swing  trunks  high  in  the 
air  to  catch  them  and  then  carry  them  to  mouths  with  trunks., 

2.  Odd   rows   snap   whips   and    even   rows   gallop   in   place   as    if   horses. 

Second  time  whips  are  snapped,  trot ;  third  time,  high  step. 

3.  Chariot  race.     All  face  side  of  room.     Even  rows  stand  in  seats  with 

arms  stretched  out  driving.  Odd  rows  take  hands  across  and  gallop 
in  place. 

4.  All  form  bands,   facing  front.     One   or  two   rows  beating  drums,    one 

or  two  rows  playing  fife,  one  or  two  rows  playing  trombone,  etc. 

5.  Two  rows  walk  around  one  row  of  desks  imitating  some  clown's  trick, 

such  as  balancing  stick  on  chin,  juggling  balls,  walking  tight  rope, 
etc. 

>|nr.     Making  Gabdex  : 

1.  Reach  up  to  get  spading  fork  and  rake  from  shelf. 

2.  Put  them  over  shoulder  and  skip  to  back  yard  or  vacant  lot  garden. 

3.  Spade  up  earth.     Turn  each  fork  full  over  and  strike  it  hard  to  break 

up  large  pieces. 

4.  Rake  garden. 

5.  Pick  up  stones  and  throw  them  into  a  pile. 

6.  Run  to  get  a  wheelbarrow. 

7.  Stoop    to    pick    up    stones    and    put    them    into    wheelbarrow.      Wheel 

them  to  corner  of  garden  and  dump  in  a  pile. 

8.  Plant  seed. 

9.  Blow  up  seed  bags.     Break  them  between  hands  and  say  "Bang!" 


16  Physical  Education 

GAMES 

1.  Drop  the  Handkerchief  : 

Formation :     Children  in  circle,  hands  joined. 

Action:  One  child  chosen  to  be  "it"  runs  around  outside  of  circle  and 
drops  handkerchief  behind  a  second  child  who  picks  it  up.  and  chases 
first  child.  First  child  tries  to  get  back  to  opening  left  bj 
second  child.  If  he  succeeds  he  may  stay  in  circle.  If  caught  ht 
must  go  in  center.  Second  child  now  runs  around,  drops  the  hand- 
kerchief and  game  continues.  If  the  children  in  the  center  can 
succeed  in  snatching  the  handkerchief  before  the  one  for  whom  it 
is  intended,  they  may  chase,  and  the  one  for  whom  it  was  intended 
must  go  in  the  center. 

2.  Cat  and  Mouse  : 

Cat  chosen  who  hides  (usually  under  teacher's  desk.)  Several  children 
chosen  to  be  mice  creep  up  softly  and  when  all  are  assembled  they 
scratch  on  cat's  hiding  place  with  fingers.  When  cat  hears  this 
she  chases  the  mice  who  try  to  get  back  to  their  seats  without 
being  caught.  If  no  mice  are  caught  the  cat  is  "it"  again.  Do 
not  let  one  child  be  cat  too  long.  If  mice  try  to  be  caught  let  lasfl 
one  caught  be  new  cat.    Choose  new  mice  each  time. 


3.  Squirrel  in  Trees  : 
Formation :      Children  in   groups   of  threes,   hands   joined  forming  holloW| 

trees ;  one  child  or  squirrel  in  each  tree,  and  an  extra  squirrel  in  the 
middle.  At  signal  from  teacher  squirrels  change  trees,  extra  squirrel 
trying  to  get  a  tree.  Child  left  out  stays  in  center.  After  several  times] 
change  so  all  may  be  squirrels. 

4.  Slap  Jack  : 

Formation :  Circle,  hands  joined.  One  child  runis  around  and  tap! 
another  on  back.  They  run  opposite  directions  (determine  which 
way  each  is  to  run  before  commencing  game).  When  they  meei 
they  shake  right  hands  and  run  on.  Last  one  back  must  run  again. 
Vary  game  by  having  them  place  hands  on  hips  and  jump  in  place,  etc! 
Note:  If  one  child  tries  to  get  back  last  so  he  may  be  "it," vary  game 
so  first  child  back     is  runner. 

5.  Run  for  Your  Supper  : 

(Goal  game.)  Players  in  a  circle.  One  player  chosen  by  teacher  goes 
around  inside,  holds  out  his  hand  between  two  players  and  saysl 
"Run  for  your  supper."  The  two  run  around  opposite  ways  outside; 
the  one  who  first  returns  to  the  vacant  place  wins,  and  they  starl 
the  next  runners. 

6.  Squirrel  and  Nut  : 

Formation :  Like  drop  the  handkerchief,  but  children  stand  with  eyes 
shut  and  hands  behind  them.  Child  chosen  to  be  squirrel  goes 
around  and  drops  nut  in  hands  of  another  player  who  chases  himl 
If  caught,  squirrel  must  be  put  in  cage  (center  circle)  and  is 
out  of  game. 


First  Grade  17 

7.  Squirrel  and  Nut  (for  schoolroom ) . 
Where  desks   cannot   be   moved   or   there   is  no   room   for   circle,   children 

may  drop  heads  on  desks,  eyes  shut,  and  bold  hands  out  in  front  of 

them. 

8.  Fox  and  Squirrel  : 
Children  stand  in  two  straight  lines.  Pass  an  object  (the  squirrel)  zig- 
zag back  and  forth.  In  a  few  seconds  start  a  second  object  (the 
fox).  Object  of  game  is  to"  see  if  they  can  make  second  object 
overtake  first  before  end  of  line  is  reached.  May  be  played  in 
school  room  by  having  two  rows  sit  facing  each  other  with  feet 
in  aisles. 

Sheep,   Sheep  Come  Home  : 

One  player  chosen  who  represents   the  wolf,    another   the   Mother    Sheep. 

Rest  of  players  are  her  children.     Mother  sheep  stands  on   one  side 

of  room,  wolf  hides,  and  children  on  other  side  of  room. 

Mother  calls,  '"Sheep,  sheep,  come  home." 

Children.  "We're  afraid." 
Mother  "Of  what?" 
Children  "The  wolf." 
Mother  "The  wolf  has   gone   to   Dixieland   and   won't   be   back   for   seven 

days,  so  Sheep,  sheep  come  home." 
11      Sheep  run  across — wolf  chases — all  caught  must  help  him. 
11     Repeat.     Mother   crossing   over   to  other   side. 

10.     Magic  Carpet  : 

An    elimination    game    should    be    played    only    when    children    are    well 

under  control  of  teacher. 
Draw  square  on  floor.     Children  skip  or  run   through   square.     At  signal 

all  stop.     Those  caught  in  magic  carpet  are  eliminated. 

This    may    be    done    to    music.      Signal    may    be    sudden    cessation    of 

music  or  clapping  hands  or  blowing  whistle. 


LI.     Have  You  Seex  My  Sheep  : 

Formation:     Circle,   hands   joined    (may   be  played   in  seats).      One   child 

goes   up    says    to   another    "Have    you    seen    my    sheep?"      "No;    what 

does   it   look   like?"      First    child    then   describes   another   player.      As 

soon    as    second    child    guesses    who    is    being    described,    he    says    "Is 

it    ?     If   correct    he    then    chases    the    person    described 

who  runs  outside  of  aisle  and  tries  to  get  back  to  place  without 
being  caught.  If  he  succeeds  he  asks  the  question ;  if  caught,  the 
one  who  catches  him  asks  the  question. 

2.     Stoxe  :      (Draw  circle  on  floor  or  grass.) 
Formation :      Players    in    circle.      One    player,    "Stone,"    sits    or    stoops    in 
center.      Others    advance    slowly    trying    to    get    as    close    as    possible 
without  being  caught.    Stone  suddenly  jumps  up  and  chases  players  who 
rush  back  to  circle.    All  caught  become  stones. 

Phys. — 2 


18 


Physical  Education 


13.     Water  Sprite  : 

Formation :  Children  in  two  equal  lines  facing  each  other  about  10 
to  15  feet  apart.  This  space,  the  river.  Two  water  sprites  are 
chosen  who  stand  in  middle  of  river.  One  child  from  one  side 
comes  out  and  beckons  to  a  child  on  the  opposite  side.  These  two 
change  places.  If  either  is  caught  he  becomes  the  water  sprite. 
If  not  caught  stays  in  line. 

Note:  If  water  sprites  prefer  to  stay  water  sprite  and  do  not  make  any 
effort  to  catch,  change  game  so  that  a  safe  journey  to  opposite  side 
is  rewarded  by  the  player  becoming  water  sprite. 


C 


DANCES  AND  RHYTHMIC  GAMES 
1.     Farmer  in  the  Dell: — Traditional  North  Carolina  Folk  Game. 


Words :  1.  The  farmer  in  the  dell. 
The  farmer  in  the  dell. 
The  heigh-o,  the  dairy-o, 
The  farmer  in  the  dell. 

2.  The  farmer  takes  his  wife. 
The  farmer  takes  his  wife. 
The  heigh-o,  the  dairy-o, 
The  farmer  takes  his  wife. 

3.  The  wife  takes  the  child. 

4.  The  child  takes  the  nurse. 

5.  The  nurse  takes  the  dog. 

6.  The  clog  takes  the  bone. 

7.  The  bone  stands  alone. 

2.     Itiskit,    Itasket  : — Traditional  Nor 
Words :  Itiskit,    Itasket. 

A  green  and  yellow  basket, 
I   sent  a   letter   to  my   love 
And  on  the  way  I  dropped  it, 
I   dropped   it,    I   dropped   it. 
A    little    boy    picked    it    up 
And  put  it  in  his  pocket, 
His  pocket,  his  pocket. 
A   little   boy   picked   it   up 
And  put  it  in  his  pocket. 


Formation  :     Children  in  circle, 

hands     joined.      Farmer     in 
center.  Children       circle 

around  to  right  while  singing. 
Each  child  as  chosen  enters 
the  circle.  As  children  sing 
the  last  verse  all  clap  andj 
all  but  bone  return  to  circle. 
"Bone"  becomes  next  farmer. 


tk   Carolina  Folk   Game. 

Formation  :     Circle,  hands  joined. 

Action :  One  child,  with  handker- 
chief, runs  around  and  drops 
it  in  back  of  a  second  child 
who  picks  it  up  and  chases 
the  first  child.  First  child 
tries  to  get  back  to  second! 
child's  place  without  being 
caught.  If  successful  he  is 
"It"  again.  If  first  child  is] 
caught,  second  child  is  "It."  j 


ITISKIT,  ITASKET 


i! 


<hii\\  \.t\\'  tt\mi\r  titiit  [\t.&g 


E^ 


mi  cEll.THrti-E 


B  ■    '      P  P  '    '       l    V    i  P 


First  Grade 


19 


Little  Sally  Waters  : — Traditional  North   Carolina  Folk   Game. 

Players   in  circle,   all   hands   joined ;    Sally   sits   in   center  of  circle. 

"Little  Sally  Waters,  sitting  in  a  saucer ; 

Crying  and  weeping  for  some  young  man   to   court   her." 

Circle  skips  to  left,  while  Sally  pretends  to  cry. 

"Rise,   Sally,  rise ;  and  wipe  your  weeping  eyes ; 

Turn  to  the  East  and   turn   to   the  West, 

And  turn  to  the  one  that  you  like  best." 

Sally  pantomimes  the  action  described  in  the  song,  and  ends  facing 

some   player    in    the    circle,    who    takes    the    center    as    the    song    is 

repeated. 


LITTLE   SALLY   WATERS 


gjgjjgj  Jlr.cCHr  JlrrrekfcEs 


#H-*— * 


§  gg  jkfiXH'  Jlxx5i£tfftl^fl:i'Jl'i7J  i 


w 


*The  Sxail  : 

1.  Hand  in  hand  you  see  us  well 
Creep  like  a  snail  into  his  shell. 
Ever  nearer,  ever  nearer, 

Ever  closer,  ever  closer, 
Very  snug  indeed  you  dwell, 
Snail,   within   your   tiny   shell. 

2.  Hand   in   hand   you   see   us   well 
Creep  like  a  snail  out  of  his  shell. 
Ever  farther,  ever  farther, 

Ever  wider,  ever  wider  ; 

Who  would  think  this  tiny  shell 

Would  have  held  us  all  so  well. 

The  players  all  stand  in  line  holding  hands ;  while  singing  the  first  verse 
they  wind  up  in  a  spiral,  following  the  leader,  who  walks  in  a  circle 
growing  ever  smaller  until  all  are  wound  up.  stiil  holding  hands. 
The  leader  then  turns  and  unwinds,  until  all  are  again  in  one  line. 

This  "winding  up"  is  a  very  old  traditional  feature  in  games,  and  is 
supposed  to  have  originated   in   tree   worship. 


*From  Bancroft's  "Games  for  School,  Home,  Playground  and  Gymnasium,"  copyrighted 
nd  published  by  The  MacMlllan  Co.     By  permission. 


20 


Physical  Education 


SNAIL 


m*=&=& 


bk±zi 


t=R 


-v— *r 


at=* 


-* — & 


mm&M 


Hand    in      hand      you       see        us        well      Creep     like    a 

0L ■ — «- 


"fc 


:|»- 


-S- 


t 


w 


3EE= 


snail       in 


¥ 


to        his     shell ;      Ev    -   er     near   -  er,       ev    -  er 


33 


gp 


3 


^=r 


* 


:p- 


m 


1,8. 


p=t 


=t 


a  w  ■         i 


s 


near  -  er,       Ev  -  er       clos  -  er,       ev   -  er       clos  -   er,        Ve  -  ry 


dbfc 


Tiiiffl 


BE 


^=? 


i 


BE 


A=t=i 


ff-i 


3 


snug     in  -  deed     you  dwell,  Snail,with  -  irw   your     ti    -   ny     shell. 


m 


First  Geade 


21 


>.     I  Went  to  Visit  a  Friend  One  Day  : 

JYords :  1.  I  went  to  visit  a  friend  one  day. 
She  only  lived  across  the  way. 
She  said  she  coiddn't  come  ont  to  play. 
Because  it  was  her  washing  day. 
This  is  the  way  she  washed  away. 
This  is  the  way  she  washed  away. 
She  said  she  couldn't  come  out  to  play 
Because  it  was  her  washing  day. 

2.  Sweeping  day 

3.  Baking  day 

4.  Ironing  day 

5.  Calling  day 

6.  Scrubbing  day 

Formation :    Children  in  circle,  hands  joined. 

Action :  Move   around   to  right  while   singing  first   line. 

Second  line,  point  "across  the  way." 

Third  line,  shake  head. 

Chorus — Each  time  imitate  activity  mentioned. 


I  WENT  TO  VISIT  A  FRIEND  ONE  DAY 


jlrf  ffdJ  jj  rirfrrirrrrirrm- 


s 


S5 


jt 


r,  1 1  r  i 


u^[v\ii{\i\rt\ti^nA^ 


Round    and    Round    the    Village: — Traditional    North    Carolina    Folk 
Game. 
Tords :  1.  Go  round  and  round  the  village. 
Go  round   and   round   the  village 
Go  round  and  round  the  village. 
As  we  have  clone  before. 

2.  Go  in  and  out  the  windows. 

3.  Go  now  and  face  your  partner. 

4.  Now  follow  me  to  London. 
Formation :  Circle,  hands  joined. 


22 


Physical  Education 


Action  :  One   or  more  children  may  be  chosen  to  skip  around  outside  of 

circle  during  first  stanza. 

Second  stanza,  children  in  circle  raise  hands  high  making  windows ; 

children  on  outside  skip  in  and  out  of  windows  thus  formed. 

Third  stanza,  children  skipping  choose  a  partner. 

Fourth    stanza,    children    chosen    follow    partners    around    outside 

of  circle. 
Note  :     First  children  skipping  may  now  return  to  circle  or  all  may  con- 
tinue until  all  are  playing. 


ROUND  AND  ROUND  THE  VILLAGE 


J  r  E 1  r  m-fM^P 


i=£ 


r  f  ciE — fL 


7.     Little  Jack  Horner  : 

"Little  Jack  Horner" 

Step  forward  R  foot,  then  point  L  forward. 
"Sat  in  a  corner" 

Step  forward  L  foot,  then  point  R  forward. 
"Eating  his   Christmas   pie," 

Slide  3   times   to  right,   and  while  singing   "pie"   tap   L  toe  at 
side  twice. 
"He  put  in  his  thumb  and  pulled  out  a  plum,  and  said  what  a  good 
boy  am  I." 

Repeat  above  movement  starting  L. 


London   Bridge: — Tune  and  form  of  play,   traditional  North   Carolina 
Folk  Game. 
Words :  London  Bridge  is  falling  down 
Falling  down,   falling  down. 

1.  London  Bridge  is  falling  clown 
My  fair  lady. 

2.  Off  to  prison  you  must  go. 

3.  Take  the  keys  and  lock  her  up. 

The  following  words  are  also  suggested : 

1.  London  Bridge  is  falling  down. 

2.  Build  it  up  with  iron  bars. 

3.  Iron  bars  will  bend  and  break. 

4.  Build  it  up  with  gold  and  silver. 

5.  Gold  and  silver  will  be  stolen  away. 


First  Grade 

6.  Get  a   man  to  watch  all   night. 

7.  Suppose  the  man  should  fall  asleep? 

8.  Put  a  pipe  into  his  mouth. 

9.  Suppose  the  pipe  should  fall  and  break? 

10.  Get  a  dog  to  bark  all  night. 

11.  Suppose  the  dog  should  meet  a  bone? 

12.  Get  a  cock  to  crow  all  night. 

13.  Here's  a  prisoner  I  have  got. 

14.  What's  the  prisoner  done  to  you? 

15.  Stole  my  hat  and  lost  my  keys. 

16.  A  hundred  pounds  will  set  him  free. 

17.  A  hundred  pounds  he  has  not  got. 
IS.  Off  to  prison  he  must  go. 


23 


Frog  Went  A-Coukting  : — Traditional  North  Carolina  Folk  Game. 

Single  Circle,  all  hands  joined. 

1.  Frog  went  a-courting.  he  did  ride,  Um-hm  ; 
The  frog  went  a-courting,  he  did  ride 
Sword  and  pistol  by  his  side,  Um-hm. 

March  around  circle  through  verse  1. 

2.  Froggie  came  to  Mousie's  door,   Um-hm.      (Turn  to  face  partner) 
"Mistress   Mouse,    are   you   within?"    (Boy   lifts    hat    high.) 
"Yes.  kind  sir.  I  sit  and  spin,  Um-hm."   (Girl  spins,  circle  R  hand, 

tap  L  foot. ) 

3.  "Mistress   Mouse,   will   you   ride   with   me?"   etc.    (Boy    hows   loio, 

hand  across  chest.) 
"Yes,  kind  sir,  I'd  happy  be,  Um-hm."    (Girl,  makes  low  courtesy.) 

4.  So  they  had  a  merry  ride,  Um-hm ; 

So  they  had  a  merry  ride    (skip  around  circle  in  couples.) 
Frog  and  Mousie  side  by  side;  Um-hm.    (End  with  courtesy.) 


THE  FROG  WENT  A-COURTING 


p^nwTjB£?Hh^^ 


!fc 


-d* tfP— 


SgEB 


jf— p 


i±± 


^EQ^tj^^sm^^t^ 


w 


24 


Physical  Education 


10.     Hickory,     Dickory.     Dock: — Tune,     Crowmnshield's     Mother     Goose 
Melodies. 

Words:  Hickory,  dickory,  dock    (tick,  lock) 

The  mouse  ran  up  the  clock  (tick,  tock) 

The   clock   struck   one 

The  mouse  ran  down 

Hickory,  dickory,  dock. 
Formation:  Children   in    two  straight    lines    facing   about    ten    feet    apart. 
Action  :  Hands  clasped  low  in  front  of  body :  swing  in  time  with  music  for 
first  line.     Stamp  left  foot  on  tick  and  right  on  tock. 

Second  line— Take  eight  little  running  steps  forward ;  stamp  L  and 
R  on  tick  and  tock. 

Third  line — Clap  bands  once  on  "one.'1 

Fourth  line — Eight  steps  back  to  place. 

Fifth  line — Swing  pendulum  and  stamp  as  for  first  line. 


11.     The  Muffin  Man  : 

Words :  Oh,  have  you  seen  the  Muffin  Man, 

1.  The  Muffin  Man,  the  Muffin  Man? 
Oh,  have  you  seen  the  Muffin  Man 
That  lives  in  Drury  Lane? 

2.  Oh.  yes,  I've  seen  the  Muffin  Man 
The  Muffin  Man.  the  Muffin  Man 
Oh,  yes.  I've  seen  the  Muffin  Man 
That  lives  in  Drury  Lane. 

Formation :  Players  in  circle,  hands  joined,  one  or  more  in  center. 
Action :  Children  sing  verse  while  those  inside  skip  around  for  first  two 

lines.  They  stand  still  during  third  and  choose  a  partner. 
Second  verse,  those  in  center  skip  around  and  sing  "two"  "four," 

etc..  "Have  seen  the  Muffin  Man."     Continue  until  all  have  been 

chosen. 


THE  MUFFIN  MAN 


Y  ± 

,   f 

\     *     * 

\               r 

A  + 

t     f                     r*      f'    r 

It 

(y* J 

i J  '  i   >' — {-$—  r 

J  1    1 V- 

— — £ — ^ — J— 

g^g 


First  Grade 


25 


12.     My    Son   John  : 
Words 


-Tunc,    Croicninshield's   Mother   Goose   Melodies. 


Diddle,  diddle  dumpling. 

My  son  John 

Went  to  bed 

With  his  stockings  on. 

One  shoe  off 

And  the  other  shoe  on: 

Diddle,  diddle  dumpling 

My  son  John. 
Formation  :     Circle  facing  center. 
Action:  1st  line — Step  L  bring  R  foot  up  rise  on  toes  and  down 

2d    line — Step  R  bring  L  foot  up  rise  on  toes  and  down 

3d    line — Hands  up  to  side  of  face  imitate  lying  in  bed 

4th  line — Lean  forward  and  touch  stockings 

5th  line — Point  L  foot  forward 

6th  line — Point  R  foot  forward 

7th  line — Repeat  1st  line 

8th  line — Repeat  2d  line. 
All  turn  right,  hum  chorus.  4  little  running  steps  forward,  step  to  center  of 
circle,  bring  feet  together,  rise  on  toes  and  down;  repeat  to  outside 
of  circle.  Four  little  running  steps  forward:  step  to  center  of  circle, 
rise  on  toes  and  down ;  step  out.  rise  on  toes  and  down :  4  little 
running  steps  forward. 


13.     *Huxting  : 

Words:  1.  Oh.  have  you  seen  the  Shah? 
Oh,  have  you  seen  the  Shah? 
He  lights  his  pipe  on  a  starlight  night 
Oh,  have  you  seen  the  Shah? 
2.    Oh,  a-hunting  we  will  go 
A-hunting  we  will  go. 

We'll  catch  a  little  fox  and  put  him  in  a  box 
And  will  not  let  him  go. 


m 


HUNTING 


i 


url' )  jjlr  rirrrrif  r 


/ 

M  rrrfr  ff  frf  r 

r- T^j-^ 

*  r    j    j  • 

4 

jL —          4_   «_/  L  t  ' 

*From  Bancroft's   "Games  for  School,   Home,   Playground  and  Gymnasium,"   published 
by  The  Macmillan   Co.,   New  York,  used  by  permission. 


26  Physical  Education 

Formation  :     Two  equal  lines,  facing  about  5  feet  apart. 

Action  :  1st  verse,  stand  and  sing. 

2d  verse,  children  at  top  grasp  hands  and  skip  down  and  back 
between  the  two  lines  for  first  two  lines ;  last  two  lines  these 
two  drop  hands  and  race  around  behind  lines  seeing  who 
can  get  to  foot  first.     Each  goes  behind  his  own  line. 


14.     See-Saw: — Tune   Croirninshield's  Mother  Goose  Melodies. 

Words  :  See-saw,  Margery  Daw 

Jack  shall  have  a  new  master. 
He    shall   have   but   a    penny   a    day. 
Because  he  won't  work  any  faster. 
Formation :     Single  circle  facing  partners  grasping  both  hands. 
Action :  1st    line — As    children    sing    see-saw    they    rise    on    toes    bringing 
hands  above  head  and  down ;  repeat  for  Margery  Daw. 
2d  line — All  take  4  steps  forward  to  new  partner,  boys  going  to 

inside,  girls  to  outside  of  circle. 
3d  line — "He    shall    have"    hold    R    elbow    in    L    hand    and    shake 
forefinger   at  partner  3  times ;    "but  a  penny  a   day"   repeat   L 
elbow  in  R  hand. 
4th  line — Take  held  of  new  partner's  hands  and  skip  around  to 
left  making  small  circle. 


15.     Looby  Loo: — Tune  Traditional. 

Words:  1.    Here  we  dance  Looby  Loo 
Here  we  dance  Looby  Light 
Here  we  dance  Looby  Loo 
All  on  a   Saturday  night. 

2.  I    put    my    right    hand    in 
I    put  my  right  hand   out 

I  give  my  right  hand  a  shake,  shake,  shake 
And  turn  myself  about. 

3.  Repeat   1   between   each   verse. 

4.  I  put  my  left  hand  in 

5.  I  put  my  right  foot  in 

6.  I  put  my  left  foot  in 

7.  I  put  my  little  head  in 
S.    I  put  my  whole  self  in. 

Formation  :     Circle,  hands  joined. 

Action :  Slide  around  to  right  first  three  lines ;  stand  still  on  fourth. 

Suit  action  to  words  for   each  verse.     Repeat  1st  verse  between 
3d   and  4th,  etc. 


First  Grade 


27 


16.     Hey   Diddle   Diddle: — Tunc   Crow-ninsliieWs   Mother   Goose  Melodies. 

Words :  Hey  diddle  diddle,   the  cat  and   the  fiddle 

The  cow  jumped  over  the  moon : 

The  little  dog  laughed  to  see  such  sport, 

And  the  dish  ran  away  with   the  spoon. 
Formation  :     Single  circle,  facing  clockwise. 

Action  :  1st  line — Walk  forward  L   R   L   R  imitating  playing  violin,   face 
center  at  end. 

2d  line — Make  big  circle  with  hands  and  jump  toward  center. 

3d  line — Bend  over  and  laugh. 

4th  line — Reach  back  and  take  hold  of  hand  of  person  in  back  and 
run  away. 


17.     Shoemakers'  Dance  : 

Formation :     Double  circle  facing  partners. 

Action  :  Measures  1-2 — Arms  shoulder  high,  hands  clenched,  roll  one  arm 
over    other    three   times.      Reverse    and    roll    over    three    times. 
This  represents  winding  the  thread. 
Measure     3 — Pull  hands  apart  by  jerking  elbows  backward  twice. 
Measure     4 — Clap  hands  three  times. 
Measures  1-3 — Repeat. 

Measure     4 — Hammer  fists  together.     Driving  the  peg. 
Measures  5-8 — Join  inside  hands,  outside  hands  on  hips.     Skip  or 

simple  polka  step  around  room. 
Repeat  from  beginning. 


THE  SHOEMAKER 
Danish 


]3=£E 


=t 


-0 •— -H 


9± 


i=C=d: 


7      jfL       -J:    8  £ 


B.C. 


» =_ t,— J~       tu** 


2S  Physical  Education 

IS.     Rock-a-bye  Baby: — Music,  ''Mother  Goose  Melodies." 

Formation  :  Children  in  groups  of  threes.  Numbers  1  and  2  have  hands 
joined,  number  3  places  his  hands  on  their  arms.  Numbers 
1  and  2  are  the  swing ;  number  3  is  swinging.  All  numbers  3 
should  be  facing  same  direction. 

Action :  Measure  1 — Number  3  pushes  swing  forward  and  upward  and  bal- 
ances forward  on  R  foot.  L  raised  behind. 
Measure  ,  2 — Pull  swing  down  and  back  and  balancing  on  L 
foot.  Continue  singing  until  last  measure,  when  swing  is  pushed 
high  and  child  passes  under,  catching  next  swing.  Repeat,  change 
numbers  so  all  will  have  chance  to  swing. 


GRADE  II 

For  Explanation  of  Types  of  Exercises,  see  pages  10,  11. 

STORY    PLAYS 

I.  On  a  Farm  : 

1.  Run  from  car  to  farmhouse.     Each  two  rows  run  around  one  row  of 

seats. 

2.  Pump  cool  water  from  well. 

3.  Feed    chickens.      Hold    box    in    left    arm.    take    grain    out    with    right 

and  throw  over  high  fence. 

4.  Climb  ladder  into  hay  loft. 

5.  Pitch    hay    into    stall   below.      With    one    foot    forward    lift    hay    with 

pitch-  fork  and  pitch  into  chute.    Ram  hay  down  with  pitch  fork. 

6.  Climb  clown  ladder. 

7.  Run  into  house. 

8.  Tired,  take  deep  breaths. 

II.  Washing  Clothes  : 

1.  Wash  clothes  using  back  of  seat  or  desk  for  scrubbing  board.     Lean 

over  and  scrub  hard. 

2.  Put    clothes   through    wringer.      Stand    on    aisle,    facing   side    of   room. 

Left  hand  guides  clothes  while  right  turns  handle.     Wring  some  by 
hand. 

3.  Hold  basket   on  head   and   carry  out   to  line.     Two   rows   around   one 

row  of  desks. 

4.  Shake   clothes  and   hang  on   line.     Use  both   hands   and   reach  up   on 

tip-toe. 

5.  Run  out  to  play  while  clothes  dry. 

6.  Imitate  wind  blowing  clothes. 

III.  Gathering  Vegetables  : 

1.  Run  and  get  baskets,  spades  and  pails.     Let  some  hitch  horses  to  big 

farm  wagons. 

2.  Climb  into  wagons.     Climb  across  seat  into  next  aisle. 

3.  Jump  out  of  wagon.     Carry  forks  and  baskets  to  potato  patch. 

4.  Dig  and  pick  up  potatoes.     Carry  and  put  into  basket. 

5.  Get  other  vegetables :  corn,  cabbage,  pumpkins  and  carrots. 

6.  Take  pails  and  baskets  and  run  to  orchard. 

7.  Reach  up  high  to  pick  grapes  and  apples. 
S.  Carry  fruit  to  wagon. 

9.  One    child    drives    team     (around    room)     going    home.      Horses    have 

heavy  load  so  others  have  to  walk. 

IY     Playing  With   Leaves  : 

1.  Skip  out  to  yard. 

2.  Bend   knees   and    reach    out   to   get   leaves. 

3.  Put  them  on  top  of  desk. 

4.  Have  fight  with  leaves.     Two  rows  facing. 


30  Physical  Education 

5.  Gather  more  piles. 

6.  Run  into  house  for  matches.     Light  match  on  bottom  of  shoe  and  set 

leaves  afire. 

7.  Dance  around  fire. 

S.     When  lire  burns  down  make  it  bright  by  blowing  it. 

V.  Decorating  Christmas  Tree  : 

1.  Make  stand  for  tree.     Get  hammer,   nails  and  saw.     Walk  rapidly  to 

back  yard.     Knock  boards  from  an  old  box.     Saw  boards,  etc. 

2.  Carry  stand  and  tree  into  house.     Put  tree  in  one  corner  of  room. 

3.  Decorate  tree  with  presents  and  candles. 

4.  Light  candles. 

5.  Dance  around  tree. 

6.  Blow  out  candles. 

VI.  Santa  Claus'  Visit  : 

1.  Driving   reindeer.      (Sit   on   tops   of  desks   if  they  do  not   tip.     Backs 

straight,  arms  stretched  out  in  front,  hands  holding  reins.    Alternately 
pull  in  and  release  reins.    Say  "Whoa"  as  you  pull  in.) 

2.  Warming  feet.      (Jump  down  from  seats.     Place  hands  on   hips.     Up 

on  toes.     Run  in  place.     May  count  for  the  running.) 

3.  Breathing. 

4.  Santa    Claus    reading    names    on    stockings.       (Hold    pack    over    back. 

Bend  forward  from  hips.    Look  up  and  read  names.     Suggest  names, 
stand  up  straight.) 

5.  Placing  presents  in  stockings.      (Reach  to  pack  on  back.     Bend  knees 

and  stoop  forward  to  deposit  present.     Up  straight  and  stretch.) 
G.     Climbing   rope    up   the    chimney.      (Start   with    one    hand    in    front   of 
chest  and  the  other  high  up.     Alternate  hands  as  you  climb.) 

7.  Driving  reindeer. 

S.     Breathing  in  cold  air.     Watch  breath  as  you  exhale. 

VII.  Jack  o'  Lantern  : 

1.  Jump  over  stone  wall  and  go  quietly  into  field  to  get  pumpkin.     Over 

seat  into  next  aisle. 

2.  Walk  quickly,  feet  high  so  as  to  avoid  rattling  corn  stalks  and  rousing 

farmer's  dog. 

3.  Reach  down  until  you  find  a  good  one  for  your  Jack  o'  lantern.     Reach 

forward  and  back. 

4.  Run  home  quietly. 

5.  Sit  down  and  make  lantern. 

6.  Run  down  street  and  hold  lantern  up  to  someone's  window. 

Every  other  row  sits  in  desks.     Say  "Boo." 

7.  Stoop  down  to  hide  so  those  inside  can't  see.     Those  inside  look  out. 

S.     Children    with    lanterns   walk    to    next    window    with    knees    half   bent 

so  they  won't  be  seen.     Stoop  and  say  "Boo." 
9.     Run   home   softly   on   tiptoes. 

10.  Blow  out  candles  3  deep  puffs. 

11.  Repeat  from  6  on  with  rest  of  children. 


Second  Grade  3 1 

VIII.  Brownies'  Party  : 

1.  Wiud  blows  calling  brownies. 

2.  Brownies  run  to  party  in  woods. 

3.  Look  up  to  see  if  moon  shines  and  to  see  stars. 

4.  Raise  arms  to  catch  leaves  as  they  fall. 

5.  Gather  leaves  and  scatter. 

6.  Run  thru  leaves. 

7.  Wind  blows  telling  brownies"  party  is  over  (breathing). 

IX.  Modes  of  Travel  : 

1.  With  horse  and  wagon.     Sit  on  desk  and  drive  horse. 

2.  On  street  car.     Crowded  car,  so  reach  up  high  to  hold  strap. 

Conductor  ringing  up  fares.  Teach  "Safety  first."'  Show  correct 
way  to  step  from  a  street  car.  Have  children  practice  using  desks 
and  seats  for  street  cars. 

3.  On  bicycle  and  motorcycle. 

4.  In   automobile. 

5.  On  steam  train.     Ring  bell,  blow  whistle,   have   arms   describe  action 

of  piston    make  sound  of  escaping  steam  while  running  around  room. 

X.  Members  op  the  Fire  Department  : 

1.  Driving  horses  to  fire.     Different  fire  apparatus  for  each  row  of  chil- 

dren.    Gallop  around  the  room.     "Ready — go ;"  and  back  to  seats. 

2.  Deep  breathing  to  prepare  for  work.    "In  !  Out !". 

3.  Playing  water  on  flames.     Feet  apart,  grasp  hose  in  front,  arms  out- 

stretched. Move  arms  slowly  to  left  side,  twisting  the  body  some- 
what— one !  Sway  over  to  right  side — two !  Repeat  and  try  in 
rhythm,  make  a  hissing  noise  to  represent  the  noise  of  water  rushing 
through    nozzle. 

4.  Climbing  ladder  to  window.     Opposite  hand  and  foot  used.     Left  hand 

and  foot  used.  Left  hand  and  right  knee  up.  Changing  hand  and 
knee-change  !  Again — one  !  two  !  Keep  it  up — begin  ! 

5.  Chopping  window  open.    Feet  apart,  hands  over  right  shoulder  grasping 

axe,  body  twisted  somewhat.  Chop  down — one !  Swing  to  other 
shoulder — two  !  Keep  it  going  ten  minutes — go  ! 

6.  Throwing   clothes    out    of   window.      Stoop    down,    pick    up    armful    of 

clothes,  etc. — one  !  Stretch  up  and  throw  out  of  window — two !  Repeat. 

7.  Descending  ladder. 

S.     Driving   horses   home.      Slow    trotting   around    room,    holding   reirs    in 

front. 
9.     Getting  rid  of  smoke  in  lungs.     In  !  Out ! 

XI.  Moving  Day  : 

1.  Select  a  few  children  to  represent  moving  van  with  one  child  as  driver. 

At  given  signal  have  driver  bring  van  to  front  of  room. 

2.  Lord  van   with   furniture.      Some   children   can   carry   things   to   front 

of  room  while  others  pack  them  in  van. 

3.  Stoop   to   roll   up   rugs.      Climb    on   ladder   and   reach   up   high   to   get 

pictures. 


32  Physical  Education 

4.  Get  barrels  from  the  basement  (cellar)  and  roll  them  out  to  the  van. 

5.  Shake  curtains  and  small  rugs  before  putting  them  in  van.     Blow  to 

represent  wind  carrying  the  dust  away. 

6.  All  loaded.     Climb  on  van  and  drive  to  new  house.     Skip  around  room. 

7.  Unload   van.     Repeat   some  of   the  above  and   let   children  add   other 

items. 

XII.  Cleaning  House  : 

1.  Open  windows.     Reach  up  to  pull  top  ones  down.     Push  up  lower  ones. 

2.  Roll  up  rugs.     Stoop  and  walk  forward  a  few  steps  as  you  roll  rugs. 

3.  Carry  rugs  out  of  doors. 

4.  Shake  small  rugs.    Beat  others.    Kneel  on  one  knee.    Use  beater  in  right 

hand  and  then  in  left  hand.     May  use  beater  in  both  hands. 

5.  Blow  the  dust  away. 

6.  Run  into  house  and  sweep  floors. 

7.  Get  rugs  and  replace  them  on  floor. 

S.     Wipe  furniture  with  cloth.     Reach  up  high  to  clean  shelves. 
9.     Get  dust  out  of  lungs.     Breathe  in  fresh  air  from  windows. 

XIII.  Mowing  Lawn  : 

1.  Push   lawn   mower   around   room   or   around   one   row   of  seats. 

2.  Run  to  tool  house.     Reach  up  to  get  rake  and  broom.     Get  wheelbarrow 

also.    Wheel  it  to  lawn. 

3.  Rake  grass. 

4.  Stoop  down  and  get  armsful  of  grass  to  put  in  wheelbarrow. 

5.  Wheel  grass  to  back  yard.     Dump  in  pile. 

6.  Go  back  to  get  some  heavy  stones.     Stoop  to  lift  them. 

7.  Sweep  sidewalk  and  put  tools  away. 
S.  Skip  into  house  and  get  lunch. 

XIV.  Shoemakee  and  Elves  : 

1.  Tired  shoemaker  works  slowly  making  shoes. 

2.  Yawns,  stretches  and  goes  to  bed. 

3.  Elves  come  dancing. 

4.  Elves  make  shoes.     Wax  thread,  bore  holes  with  awl,  pound  nails. 

5.  Elves  dance  away  at  daybreak. 

6.  Shoemaker  goes   to   work   and   is   surprised   to   see   shoes   all   finished. 

7.  Shoemaker  and  wife  make  clothes  for  elves. 

8.  At  night  elves  return,  put  on  new  clothes  and  dance  in  fairy  circle. 

XV.  Imitative  Activities  : 

1.  Dog  can  trot  or  run  slowly  or  quickly.     One  row  at  a  time  does  each. 

2.  Bear  can  walk  on  hind  legs.     Walk  slowly  using  arms  for  balance. 

3.  Cat  goes  quietly — run  on  tiptoes. 

4.  Elephants — hands  in  front  to  represent  trunks :    walk  slowly  swaying 
from  side  to  side. 

5.  Rooster   walk    (hands   on   hips,   bend   L  knee  up,    stretch   leg   straight 

forward  and  place  on  floor.     Repeat  R,  etc.) 


Second  Grade 


33 


10. 
11. 


Frog  hop — Hands  on  floor  between  knees  which  are  bent.     Take  short 

and  long  hops  around  room. 
Kun  like  deer. 
Blow  up  balloons. 

Sway  from  side  to  side,  feet  apart,  let  hand  slide  down  leg. 
Walk  on  tiptoes   (hands  on  hips). 
Bouncing  ball    (jump  up  and  down  in  place  bouncing  ball  with  hands. 

Some  bounces  are  high,  others  not.    Take  three  small  jumps  and  one 

big  one.) 


GAMES  AND  CONTESTS 

Hawk  and  Dove  :  Teacher  chooses  one  child  to  be  hawk  and  a  second  to  be 
dove.  Each  child  grasps  teacher's  hand.  Teacher  releases  dove  first 
who  flies  away.  A  few  seconds  later  hawk  is  released  and  chases  dove. 
Chase  continues  until  teacher  claps  hands  when  dove  tries  to  return 
without  being  caught.  Dove  remains  clove  unless  caught,  when  he 
chooses  another  dove.     Same  for  hawk. 


"Thkead  the  Needle. 


Phys. — 3 


34  Physical  Education 

Numbers  Change:  Each  child  is  given  a  number.  Child  who  is  "it"  stands 
in  front  of  room.  Teacher  calls  two  numbers.  Children  whose  num- 
bers are  called  stand  and  change  places.  Child  who  is  "it"  tries  to 
catch  one  of  these  players  before  he  gets  to  his  seat.    Child  caught  is  "it." 

Jump  the  Erook  :  Mark  a  space  a  few  feet  wide  on  floor.  Children  run  and 
try  to  jump  over  "brook"  just  made.  If  successful  they  continue.  If  they 
get  their  feet  wet  they  must  return  to  their  seats  and  are  out  of  the 
game.     When  all  have  had  one  try,  increase  width  of  brook. 

Jump  Fenc  e  :  Same,  only  use  yardstick  for  fence.  Raise  it  as  soon  as 
all  have  had  one  trial. 

Meet  at  the  Switch  :  Sides  even,  teacher  standing  in  front  of  room 
holds  eraser  in  each  hand.  One  child  from  each  side  comes  up  and 
grasps  eraser.  Teacher  lets  go  of  both  simultaneously.  Children  race 
around  going  to  right  when  they  meet.  Child  who  first  places  eraser 
in  hand  of  teacher  wins.     If  one  child  fails  to  go  to  right  other  side  wins. 

Eraser  Relay  :  Rows  even  across  room.  Place  an  eraser  on  floor  beside 
each  child  of  outside  row.  At  signal  each  child  picks  up  eraser  beside 
him,  changes  it  from  one  hand  to  the  other  above  head  and  puts  down 
on  floor  in  aisle  between  him  and  next  child,  who  repeats.  Row  that 
gets  eraser  across  room  first  wins. 

The  First  of  May  :  Goal  Game.  Two  adjacent  rows  play  a  game  together. 
The  first  of  May  is  moving  time,  and  the  seats  are  houses.  One 
player  is  chosen  to  be  "It"  and  he  walks  up  and  down  the  street 
between  the  two  rows.  The  residents  along  the  street  change  houses 
before  and  behind  him  and  he  tries  to  get  a  house  while  it  is  vacated. 
The  seats  not  occupied  and  one  more  must  be  marked  and  not  used  in 
the  game,  so  that  there  is  at  all  times  one  person  without  a  house. 
If  the  people  do  not  move  often  enough  the  one  who  is  "It"  may  number 
tbe  players  and  tben  when  he  calls  two  or  three  numbers  they  must 
change  places. 

Hopping  Relay  :  Even  numbers  in  each  row.  At  signal  first  child  stands 
holds  one  foot  in  hand,  hops  up  and  touches  front  of  room  and  returns 
to  place.  As  soon  as  he  sits  down  second  child  repeats.  If  both  feet 
are  touched  to  floor  row  is  disqualified. 

Note.     May  race  around  rows  as  in  Automobiles. 

Hound  and  Rabbit  :  Children  stand  in  groups  of  3's  representing  hollow 
trees,  a  rabbit  in  each  tree.  One  extra  rabbit  with  no  tree  and  a  hound. 
Hound  chases  rabbit  wbo  may  take  refuge  in  any  tree  but  there  may 
be  but  one  rabbit  in  a  tree.  First  rabbit  must  run  and  take  refuge 
in  some  other  tree.  "When  hound  catches  rabbit  they  change  places, 
the  hound  running  away,  the  rabbit  chasing. 

Good  Morning  :  Goal  Game.  Players  in  a  circle.  One  player  goes  around 
outside  of  circle  and  taps  another  player  on  the  back.  They  run  around 
opposite  ways  and  on  meeting  on  the  other  side  of  the  circle  they  must 
stop  and  shake  hands  and  bow  and  say  "Good  Morning"  three  times  and 


Second  Grade  35 

then  go    in  the  same  direction  as  before.    The  one  reaching  vacant  place 
last  must  start  a  new  game. 

Squat  Tag  :  Choose  one  player  to  be  "It."  Players  stand  in  any  irregular 
places.  The  one  who  is  "It"  tries  to  tag  players,  and  they  are  free  from 
being  tagged  as  long  as  they  hold  a  squatting  position,  (knees  bent). 
When  the  one  who  is  "It"  is  not  near  they  stand  up  again.  Each  player 
may  use  this  way  to  escape  being  tagged  three  times,  and  then  can 
escape  only  by  running.  Anyone  who  is  tagged  is  "It"  and  the  game 
is  repeated. 

Overhead   Relay  :     Even   number    in    each    row. 

An  object  is  placed  in  front  of  desk  in  each  row.  At  signal,  first 
child  passes  object  in  both  hands  over  head.  Each  child  must  touch 
object  with  both  hands  and  pass  overhead.  When  last  child  receives 
object  he  stands  on  right  of  desk  and  runs  tagging  front  of  room. 
When  he  is  out  of  aisle  players  stand  in  right  and  move  back  one 
seat.  Repeat  until  all  are  back  in  original  places.  Count  first  place 
5,  second.  3,  1st,  1.  One  point  off  each  time  child  stands  on  left  of 
own   desk. 

Twelve  O'clock  at  Night  :  Tag  Game.  Mark  off  a  fox's  den  in  one 
corner  and  a  chicken  yard  in  another.  Choose  a  player  to  be  the  fox 
and  another  to  be  the  mother  hen.  The  rest  of  the  players  are  chickens. 
The  mother  hen  arranges  the  chickens  in  a  compact  group  and  then 
leads  them  up  close  to  the  fox's  den  and  inquires :  "If  you  please, 
Mr.  Fox,  what  time  is  it?"  If  he  replies  any  hour  except  midnignt, 
they  are  safe  and  may  play  about ;  the  hen  lets  them  play  a  moment 
and  then  gets  them  together  again  and,  standing  between  them  and  the 
fox,  asks  the  time  again.  When  he  replies  "Twelve  o'clock  at  night,"  they 
must  run  to  the  chicken  yard,  and  the  fox  tries  to  tag  one.  The  fox 
chooses  a  fox  for  next  time,  the  mother  hen  chooses  another  player  in  her 
place,  and  the  game  begins  again. 

RHYTHMIC  GAMES  AND  DANCES 

1.     Rabbit  in  the  Hollow  :     German  Folk  Game  from  "Hansel  and  Gretel." 

Words :  Rabbit  in  the  hollow  sits  and  sleeps, 
Hunter  in  the  forest  nearer  creeps, 
Little  rabbit ;  have  a  care 
Deep  within  your  hollow  there 
Quickly  to  the  forest 
You  must  run,  run,  run. 

Formation :     Circle,  hands  joined.     One  child  chosen  to  be  rabbit  crouches 

in    center ;    another,    the    hunter    hides    outside    the    circle. 

Determine  where  rabbit's  home  is  so  that  he  may  be  safe. 

Action :  Children  forming  circle  move  around   to   left  while   singing  first 

5    lines.      Stand    still    on    last   line    while    rabbit    breaks    through 

circle  and  tries  to  get  home.     If  he  succeeds  he  may  be  rabbit 


36 


Physical  Education 


agaiu.      If   caught,    Lie   must    return   to   circle   and   choose   a   new 

rabbit.     Repeat. 

For  last  line  children  may  sing  "Hop,  hop,  hop"  or  "Hide,  hide, 

hide."     If  they  sing  "Hide,  hide,  hide,"  the  rabbit  crouches  down 

in  circle  again  and  the  children  try  to  keep  the  hunter  out  of  the 

circle. 

RABBIT  IN  THE  HOLLOW 


iikfJ^irrji^Jrunrul^ 


» J?  J>| ]y 


JhO-JUE 


£ 


•f. 


1> — w 


^-F 


m 


h 


5=2 


i 


s 


g     / 


^ 


2.     Mazoo  :     Traditional  Southern  Game. 

Words :  1.    Go   round   and  round   the  circle 
Mazoo,  Mazoo : 
Go  round  and  round  the  circle 
My  Susie  Anna  Sue. 

2.  Go  in  and  out  the  windows. 

3.  Go  wash  your  tiny  windows. 

4.  Now  let  me  see  you  hustle. 

Formation :     Circle,  hands  joined.     One  child  outside  of  circle. 

Action :  Child    on    outside    skips    around    while    children    sing    first    verse 

During  second  verse  children  in  circle  hold  hands  high,  others 
skip  in  and  out. 

Third  verse — skip  around  inside  of  circle  pretending  to  wash  faces 
of  other  children. 

Fourth  verse — children  who  have  been  skipping  choose  partners. 
All  hustle.  To  "hustle,"  time  and  action  same  as  for  skipping 
in  place  but  lifted  foot  is  put  down  behind,  crossing  feet  each 
time.     Repeat  from  beginning.     Continue  until  all  are  playing. 


MAZOO 


■4rmifHrJ4Qgii 


m 


a 


IW 


Second  Grade 


37 


3.  Did  You  Evek  See  a  Lassie?:     (Words  and  Music  Traditional.) 

Formation :     Either  in  circle  or  children  standing  beside  seats. 
Action :  One  child  leads,  standing  in  front  of  room  or  in  center  of  circle. 
On  words  "Go  this  way  and  that  way"  make  motions  which  other 
children  follow. 

1.  Children  in  circle  moving  to  left  around  "lassie." 

"Did  you  ever  see  a  lassie,  a  lassie,  a  lassie, 
Did  you  ever  see  a  lassie,  do  this  way  and  that?" 

2.  Circle  stands  and  imitates  action  done  by  "lassie." 

"Do  this  way  and  that  way ;  do  this  way  and  that  way ; 
Did  you  ever  see  a  lassie,  do  this  way  and  that." 
To  take   her  place   in   center,    "Lassie"   chooses   the  child   who 
guesses  what  activity  was  being  imitated,  and  the  game  pro- 
ceeds. 

4.  Oats,  Peas,  Beans:     Traditional  North  Carolina  Folk   Game. 
Words:  1.    Oats,  peas,  beans  and  barley. grows 

Oats,  peas,  beans  and  barley  grows 
Nor  you,  nor  I,  nor  nobody  knows 
How  oats,  peas,  beans  and  barley  grows. 

2.  Thus  the  farmer  sows  his  seeds  (make  sowing  motion) 
Thus  he  stands  and  takes  his  ease    (stand  arms  folded) 
Stamps  his  foot  and  claps  his  hands    (stand  and  clap  hands) 
And  turns  around  to  view  his  land.    (Turn  in  place  to  right.) 

3.  Waiting  for  a  partner 

Waiting  for  a  partner 
Open  the  gates  and  choose  one  in 
Make  haste  to  choose  your  partner. 
Formation :     Circle,   hands   joined.    Child   chosen   to   be  farmer   stands   in 

center. 
Action  :  1st  verse — Circle   around   to   left. 

2d    verse— Stand  still  making  appropriate  motions. 
3d    verse — Farmer  chooses  partner  and  enters  circle  again.    Repeat 
from  beginning. 

OATS,  PEAS,  BEANS 


I^^Nlrm^tofbitfl^OT 


5.     Three  Dukes  :     Traditional  North  Carolina  Folk  Game. 
Words :  1.    Here  come  three  dukes  a-riding 
A-riding.  a-riding 
Here  come  three  dukes  a-riding 
Sir  Ransom-Tansom-Tardio. 
2.    Pray  what  are  you  riding  here  for? 
Here  for,  here  for? 
Pray  what  are  you  riding  here  for? 
Sir   Ransom-Tansom-Tardio? 


38 


Physical  Education 


3.  We  have  come  forth  to  rnarry-o. 

4.  Pray  which  of  us  will  you  have,   Sir? 

5.  You're  all  black  as  charcoal ! 

6.  We're  just  as  clean  as  you,   Sir ! 

7.  You're  all  as  stiff  as  pokers ! 

8.  We  can  bend  as  well  as  you,  Sir ! 

9.  Down  the  kitchen  and  down  the  hall 

Choose  the  fairest  of  them  all ! 
The  fairest  one  that  I  can  see 

come  over  to  me. 

Formation :     3   Dukes   on   one   side    of   room.      Rest   of  children   on   other 

side  in  line,  hands  joined. 
Action :  3  Dukes  advance  and  retire  singing  1st  verse. 
Line  advance  and  retire  singing  2d  verse. 
Dukes  sing  verses  3,  5,  7,  alternating  with  the  rest  of  the  children 

who  sing  verses  4,  6,  8,  bowing  on  Sth. 
Dukes    say    "Down    the   kitchen,    etc."    naming   person    they    wish 

to  have. 
Choose  new  Dukes  or  play  "Here  come  Four  Dukes,"  etc. 

HERE  COME  THREE  DUKES 


-3^-rrr 


fi>,    >■ 


^^ 


~j         J"~^~^E 


P=P 


ild    :-    :d      Id    :-    :n      I  s_ 
come  three  Dukes   a    -    rid 


:d      I  r     :-    :r      Is,    :-     :S,      I  d     :-    :d      Id 
Sir     Ran  -  som,  Tan  -  som,     Tar    -   dy    O! 


6.     Old   Roger    (Old  Pompey) 
Words:  1. 


Traditional  North   Carolina  Folk   Game. 


Old  Roger  is  dead  and  lies  in  his  grave, 
Hm !  Ha !  Lies  in  his  grave.' 
They  planted  an  apple  tree  over  his  head, 
Hm !  Ha !  Over  his  head. 
The  apples  were  ripe  and  ready  to  drop. 
There  came  an  old  woman  a-picking  them  up. 
Old  Roger  got  up  and  gave  her  a  thump. 
Which  made  the  old  woman  go  hippity  hop. 


Second  Grade 


39' 


Formation :     Circle,    hands   joined.     Choose   Old   Roger  who   lies   down   in 

center,  arms  folded  over  chest. 
Action :  Players   sing   and   sway   from   side   to   side   as   tho  mourning,    1st 
verse. 
2d    verse — Child  representing  apple  tree  enters  circle  with   arms 

stretched  out  shoulder  height,  fingers  extended. 
3d  verse — Tree  moves  fingers    (apples  falling.) 
4th  verse — Child  representing  old  woman  comes  in  and  picks  up 

apples. 
5th  verse — Roger  gets  up  and  chases  old  woman. 
6th  verse — Roger  lies  down,   old  woman  limps  around   circle. 
Each   child  then  chooses  another   to  take  his  place  and  game  is 
repeated. 

OLD  ROGER  IS  DEAD  -_,„ 


7.     Nuts  in  May:     Tune — Mulberry  Bush. 

Words :  Here  we  come  gathering  nuts  in   May. 

1.  Nuts  in  May,   nuts  in  May. 

Here  we  come  gathering  nuts  in  May 
On  a  cold  and  frosty  morning. 

2.  Whom  will  you  have  for  nuts  in  May? 

3.  Oh,  we  will  have for  nuts  in  May. 

4.  Whom  will  you  send  to  fetch  her  away? 

5.  Oh,  we  will  send to  fetch  her  away. 

Formation  :     Children  facing  each  other  in  two  equal  lines. 
Action :  One  line  advances  and  retires  singing  first  stanza. 

Second  line  advances  and  retires  singing  second  stanza. 

First  line  advances  and  retires  singing  third  stanza   (naming  child 

in  other  line). 
Second  line  advances  and  retires  singing  fourth  stanza. 
First  line  advances  and  retires  singing  fifth  stanza   (naming  child 

in  own  line). 
The    two    children    named    then    go    up    to    line    which    has    been 

drawn,   grasp  right  hands  and   stand  with  right  toes  touching. 

They  then  see  which  can  pull  the  other  across  to  his  side  of  the 

line.     The   one    that    succeeds    returns   to   his    own    line   taking 

his  captive  with  him. 
Repeat,  second  line  advancing  singing  first  stanza. 


8.     Roman    Soixieks  :     Traditional    Old   English    and    North    Carolina   Folk 
Game. 
Words:  1.  Have  you  any  bread  or  wine? 
For  we  are  the  Romans ; 
Have  you  any  bread  or  wine? 
For  we  are  the  Roman  Soldiers. 


40  Physical  Education 

2.  Yes  we  have  some  bread  and  wine, 
For  we  are  the  English  : 

Yes  we  have  some  bread  and  wine, 
For  we  are  the  English  Soldiers. 

3.  Then  we'll  have  just  one  cup  full. 

4.  No  you  shan't  have  one  cup  full. 

5.  Then  we'll  tell  the  king  on  you. 

6.  We  don't  care  for  your  king  or  you. 

7.  Then  we'll  tell  the  Pope  on  you. 

8.  We  don't  care  for  your  Pope  or  you. 

9.  Then  we'll  send  our  dogs  that  bite. 

10.  We  don't  care  for  your  dogs  or  you. 

11.  Then  we'll  send  our  cats  that  scratch. 

12.  We  don't  care  for  your  cats  or  you. 

13.  Are  you  ready  for  a  tight? 

14.  Yes  we're  ready  for  a  fight. 

Formation :     Equal  lines  facing  standing  about  10  to  12  feet  apart.     Draw 

chalk  line  half  way  between. 
Action :  Romans  advance  and  retire  singing  verses  1,  3,  5,  7,  9,  11,  13. 

English  advance  and  retire  singing  verses  2,  4,  6,  8,  10,  12,  14. 
Make  appropriate  motions  in  verses  11  and  12. 
At  end  step  up  to  line  and  each  grasp  opponents  right  hand  at 
signal  all  pull.     Any  that  are  pulled  over  line  must  go  on  that 
side. 


h#A 


THE  ROMAN  SOLDIERS 

6     |    I  \J  J*  J 


^^hM^J^m 


9.     Jenny  Jones:     Tune — Here  ice  go  Round  the  Mulberry  Bush,  Traditional 
North  Carolina  Folk  Game. 

Formation :     One  child,   representing  Jenny  Jones,  kneels  down ;   another, 
the  mother,  stands  in  front  of  her  with  skirts  spread  out  to  hide 
her.     Rest  of  children  form  a  straight  line  facing  mother. 
Action :  The   line,    holding  hands   skips   S  steps  up   to   the  mother   and  8 
steps  back  to  place  singing. 
We've  come  to  see  poor  Jenny  Jones 
Jenny  Jones,  Jenny  Jones. 
We've  come  to  see  poor  Jenny  Jones. 
How  is  she  now? 

They  stand  still  while  mother  imitating  washing  sings : 
Jenny  Jones  is  washing,  washing,  washing. 

Jenny  Jones  is  washing,  you  can't  see  her  now 
Children  walk  up  and  back  4  steps  as  before  singing: 
Very  well,  ladies,  ladies,  ladies, 
Very  well,  ladies,  gentlemen,  too. 
Throughout  game  children  advance  and  retire,  mother  stands  still  making 
appropriate  motions. 


Second  Grade  41 

Children  repeat  first  verse 
Mother  :    "Jenny  is  starching" 
Children :    "Very  well,  ladies,"  etc. 

"We've  come  to  see  Miss  Jenny  Jones" 
Mother  :    "Jenny  is  ironing" 
Children  :    "Very  well,  ladies,"  etc. 

"We've  come  to  see  Miss  Jenny  Jones" 
Mother  :    "Jenny  is  ill" 
Children :     "Very  well,  ladies," 

"We've  come  to  see  Miss  Jenny  Jones" 
Mother  :    "Jenny  is  dying" 
Children  :     "Very  well,  ladies," 

"We've  come  to  see  Miss  Jenny  Jones" 
Mother :    "Jenny  is  dead" 
Children :    "Very  well,  ladies,"  etc. 

"We'll   come  to  the  funeral,  funeral,   funeral, 

We'll  come  to  the  funeral 

Will  that  do?" 
Mother :    "You  may  come  to  the  funeral,  funeral,  funeral 

You  may  come  to  the  funeral,  that  will  do" 
Children  :    "Very  well,  ladies" 

"We'll  come  in  red 

Red,  red 

We'll  come  in  red 

Will  that  do?" 
Mother :    "Red  is  for  soldiers,  soldiers,  soldiers 

Red  is  for  soldiers,  that  won't  do." 
Children  :    "Very  well,  ladies" 

We'll  come  in  blue,"  etc. 
Mother :    "Blue  is  for  sailors,  sailors,  sailors, 

Blue  is  for  sailors,  blue  won't  do" 
Children  :    "Very  well,  ladies" 

"We'll  come  in  pink" 
Mother :    "Pink  is  for  babies" 
Children  :    "Very  well,  ladies" 

"We'll  come  in  yellow'' 
Mother :    "Yellow  is  for  jealousy" 
Children  :    "Very  well,  ladies" 

"We'll  come  in  white" 
Mother :    "White  is  for  weddings" 
Children  :    "Very  well,  ladies" 

"We'll  come  in  black" 
Mother :    "Black  is  for  funerals,  funerals,  funerals 

Black    is   for   funerals,    black   will   do" 
Six  children  pick  up  Jenny    (who  has  fallen  over)    and  carry  her  a  short 
way.     Mother  and  rest  follow  weeping.     They  then  put  Jenny  down.     Jenny 
gets  up  and  chases  them.     First  two  caught  are  Mother  and  Jenny. 


42 


Physical  Education 


10.  Pussy    Cat:     Tune- — Croivninshield's   Mother   Goose   Melodies. 

Words:  Pussy  cat,  pussy  cat  (1) 

Where  have  you  been?  (2) 

I've  been  to  London  (3) 

To  visit  the  queen  (4) 

Pussy  cat,  pussy  cat,   (5) 

What  did  you  there?    (6) 

I  frightened  a  little  mouse   (7) 

Under  her  chair.  (S) 
Formation :     Single  circle,  hands  joined.     Cat  stands  in  middle. 
Action  :  Lines  1  and  2 — Children  take  4  slides  around  to  right. 

Lines  3  and  4 — Cat  bows  and  sings  lines. 

Lines  5  and  6 — Four  steps  in  toward  center,  shaking  finger  at  cat. 

Lines  7  and  8 — Cat   whirls   around,   arms  shoulder  height  as   she 
sings. 
Children  run  back  to  places. 
Repeat   1  and  2,  sliding  to  left. 

3  and  4,  4  steps  into  circle. 

5  and  6,  stand  still  and  sing. 

7  and  8,  cat  whirls  and  joins  circle. 
Choose  new  cat  and  repeat. 

11.  The  Bridge  of  Avignon  : 

Words :  1.  On  the  bridge  of  Avignon 

They  are  dancing,  they  are  singing 
On  the  bridge  of  Avignon 
They  are  dancing  in  a  ring 
Gentlemen  do  this  way  : 
Then  they  all  do  this  way. 

2.  Ladies  all  do  this  way 
Then  they  all  do  this  way. 

3.  All  the  priests  do  this  way. 

4.  Soldiers  all  do  this  way. 

5.  Street  boys  all  do  this  way. 

Formation  :     Single  circle,  facing  forward,  hands  joined. 
Action :  1st  8  measures — skip  around  to  left ;  at  end  of  8th  measure  come 
to  stop  and  drop  hands. 


THE  BRIDGE  OF  AVIGNON 


m  I  jBjggj||j  j  i- 1 1  uMj-i 


s 


h- 


F.« 


PC 


iffjXt^T^^i^^^^^l  J   ^ 


Second  Grade 


43 


Measure  9  aud  10 — face  partners  as  they  sing  "this  way"  make  a 

bow  as  though  removing  hat. 
Measure  11  and  12 — face  opposite  direction  and  repeat  9  and  10. 
Repeat  measure  1-8. 
Measure  9  and  10 — make  courtesy  to  partner,  11  and  12,  courtesy 

other  way. 
Continue   repeating   third   time,   put  palms  together  fingers   down 

and  incline  head. 
Fourth  time  salute. 
Fifth  time,  put  thumbs  in  ears  and  wiggle  fingers. 

12.     The  Circus  : 

In  couples,  single  circle.  R  shoulders  to  center. 
I.   (a)   "I  am  going  to  the  circus. 

Come  and  take  a  ride  with  me'; 
I  should  like  to  ride  a  pony — 
I  can  do  it  you  will  see." 
Circle  marches  around,  singing  the  stanza  above, 
(b)    "Gee  up.   come  along. 
Gee  up,  come  along ; 
Gee  up,  come  along ; 
Whoa — back — whoa." 
One  player   of  each   couple   is   the    "pony,"    and   is   driven    by   the   player 
behind  him  ;  the  pony  stretches  arms  back  to  grasp  the  hands  of  the 
"driver,"  and  the  circle  gallops  or  trots  lightly  until  "Whoa,"  where 
all  stand  still ;  back  one  step ;  and  stand. 
II.    When    the    words    call    for    "elephant,"    all    bend    forward    and    swing 
clasped  hands  from  side  to  side,  imitating  trunk ;  have  movements  slow 
and  ponderous. 
Ill     "Reindeer ;"  form  horns  by  placing  thumbs  at  sides  of  head,  spread- 
ing fingers ;  trot  softly,  as  on  snow. 
Other  animals  may  be  added  to  suit  conditions. 


THE  CIRCUS 


* 


iHb- 


&£tirf¥njfti$JT\\  riP\n  n£p 


-fc 


k&&f\Wk 


fee 


>.     The  Little  Pony  : 

Single  circle,  all  facing  center.     One  player  in  the  center  is  the  pony. 
1.  "Trot,  trot,  trot,  through  the  pasture  lot : 

Though  the  road  be  rough  and  stony,  trot  along,  my  little  pony ; 
Trot,  trot,  trot,  trot,  trot ;  through  the  pasture  lot." 


44 


Physical  Education 


The   center   player    trots   around   inside   circle   during   the   singing   of   the 
above  verse. 

2.  Rest,  rest,  rest;  you  have  done  your  best; 

To  your  stable  I  will  lead  you,  and  on  corn  and  oats  I'll  feed 
you ; 
Rest,  my  pony,  rest ;  you  have  done  your  best." 
All  the  players  forming  circle  make  a  "stable"  of  the  arms  in  front  of  the 
chest;    the   player    inside   circle    enters    a    "stable"    during   singing   of 
second  verse. 

1.  Repeat  as  in  1,  but  there  are  two  ponies  inside  the  circle — the  original 

pony  and  the  player  whom  he  faced  for  the  "stable." 

2.  Each  of  the  two  ponies  enters  a  "stable." 

3.  Repeat,  having  four  in  center ;  continue  until  all  have  been  chosen. 


THE  LITTLE  PONY 


S 


fenff^g 


i* — j» & 


Q 


^14.     Swedish  Ring  Dance  : 

Formation :     Double  circle  R  shoulders  to  center,  boys  on  inside. 
Action:  Measure    1-  8 — 16  walking  steps  forward. 
Measure     9-  16—16  skipping  steps  forward. 
Measure  17-20— All  join  hands  8  slides  right. 
Measure  21-24—8  slides  left. 
Measure  25-28— Face  partners,  hands  on  hips,  girls  take  4  slides  in 

toward  center,  boys  4  slides  out,  and  back  to  place. 
Measure  29-32 — Lock  right  arm  with  partner,  left  arm  held  high  16 
running   steps   around    with    partner. 


k 


SWEDISH  RING  DANCE 


^ 


IS 


f — r 


§ 


£Ft 


€- 


t£ 


*£± 


P^P 


e±=p 


e 


*» 


*Used  by  the  kind  permission  of  Mr.  Louis  H.  Chalif,  of  the  Chalif  School  of  Dancing, 
New  York  City. 


Second  Grade 


45 


te 


m 


•^ 


« 


nm 


£& 


fca       T    i r  rf  g f 


f ft  f  fT 


# — ^     »    0  I f* 


* 


f-f 


3 


^ 


Sf 


m 


1 


3?* 5f 


m 


£ 


iL_b_ — ! 


P   F 


£5^ 


te 


ffl  r^l 


^ 


g^XLLU 


# 


3-*- 


§ 


E y 


c  .     r 


p 


* 


^ 


§ 


& 


g 


r^a 


&g 


* 


J     kUy_^_p 


— y? 


§ 


K 


m 


m 


£ 


** 


i 


*-. 


46  Physical  Education 

15.  Pop  Goes  the  Weasel  : 
(For  music,  see  p.  79.) 

Words :  A  penny  for  a  loaf  of  bread 
A  penny  for  a  needle ; 
That's  the  way  the  money  goes 
Pop  goes  the  Weasel. 
Up  and  down  the  village  street 
In  and  out  the  Eagle; 
That's  the  way  the  money  goes 
Pop  goes  the  Weasel. 
Formation  :     Circle,  hands  joined. 
Action :  One  child  skips  around  inside     of  circle  for  first  6  measures  and 

stops  in  front  of  partner. 
Measures  7  and  8 — They  both  jump  and  land  with  R  foot  forward, 

heel  touching,  repeat  L  R  L. 
First  child  now  places  his  hands  on  his  partner's  shoulders  and 

they  skip  around  for  measures  9-14  and  stop  in  front  of  another. 
Measure    15    and    16 — Repeat    7    and    8.      Continue    until    all    are 

playing.     More  than  one  child  may  be  in  center  at  beginning. 

16.  Muffin  Man   (schoolroom  form)  for  words  and  music  see  p.  24. 
Action :  Four  children  are  selected  who  go  to  different  corners  of  room. 

Children  in  their  seats  sing  first  verse  while  children  in  corners 
skip  up  and  choose  partners.  They  lead  partners  to  corners 
singing  "Two  have  seen  the  Muffin  Man,"  etc.  When  they  get 
to  corners  skip  around  singing  until  end  of  verse.  Repeat  1st 
verse  choosing  new  partners,  repeat  second  verse  singing  "Four 
have  seen  the  Muffin  Man."     Continue  until  all  are  playing. 

RELIEF  EXERCISES 

In  the  first  and  second  grades  there  is  so  much  freedom  that  these 
periods  are  not  as  essential  as  in  the  upper  grades.  If  the  children  become 
restless,  they  may  be  permitted  to  skip  or  march  around  the  room. 

Other  suggestions  are : 

1.  Let  them  sit  with  arms  shoulder  high  and  shake  fingers  hard ;  do  same 
overhead. 

2.  Jumping  in  place,   etc. 

A  few  simple  games  may  give  relief  after  a  period  of  sitting  still. 
The  following  games  are  suggested  : 

1.  Good  Morning  :  One  child  sits  with  eyes  closed.  Teacher  motions  to 
another  child  who  says  "Good  morning  Mary."  Mary  (or  whoever  has 
eyes  closed)  has  three  chances  to  guess  who  is  speaking.  If  she  guesses,  she 
may  be  it  again.     Otherwise  the  child  blindfolds  her  eyes. 

2.  Huckle  Buckle  Bean  Stalk  :  All  children  close  eyes  but  one.  He  hides 
an  object  and  then  takes  his  seat.  Rest  of  children  look  for  object.  When 
one  sees  it  he  pretends  to  look  farther,   then   quietly  takes   seat  and   says 


Second  Grade  47 

"Huckle,  buckle  beau  stalk."  Rest  continue  search.  First  one  to  see  object 
bides  it  next  time.  Iustead  of  having  all  searching  it  will  shorten  game 
to  have  a  few  play  at  a  time. 

3.  Charlie  Ovee  the  Water  :  One  player  stands  in  center.  Rest  make 
circle  and  say  "Charlie  over  the  water,  Charlie  over  the  sea,  Charlie  caugbt 
a  blackbird  and  can't  catch  me."  as  they  say  last  line  all  stoop.  Charlie 
tries  to  tag  them.  Oue  tagged  must  be  Charlie.  If  there  are  many  players, 
have  more  than  oue  cbild  in  center  at  beginning. 

The  following  imitative  activities  are  suggested  for  use  during  Relief 
Periods : 

1.  Run  like  a  cat — quietly. 

2.  Gallop  like  horses. 

3.  Walk  like  an  elephant — hands  clasped  low  in  front  swinging  from 
side  to  side. 

4.  Walk  like  a  bear — hands  on  floor,  slowly  lumbering  from  side  to  side. 

5.  Jump  like  a  frog— hands  on  floor,  arms  between  knees  jump  forward. 

6.  Rabbit  hop — knees  bent,  backs  flat,  hands  held  up  to  represent  paws, 
hop  in  this  position. 

7.  Birds  flying — arms  shoulder  height  raise  and  lower. 

8.  Aeroplane  propeller — large  arm  circles.  Wings — keep  arms  shoulder 
height,  tip  body  from  side  to  side. 

GYMNASTICS 

General  Plan  of  Gymnastic  Lesson 

Each  lesson  is  so  constructed  that  all  parts  of  the  body  share  in  the 
exercise-values ;  therefore,  the  whole  lesson  should  always  be  given.  The 
lesson  plan  is,  in  general,  as  follows : 

1.  Order.  These  exercises  are  given  primarily  to  train  pupils  in  quick 
response,  and  to  improve  neuro-muscular  coordination. 

2.  Head.  The  objectives  of  this  group  are  mainly  corrective;  upper 
shoulder  muscles  and  neck  muscles  are  tightened,   and  the  chest  expanded. 

3.  Arm.  These  exercises  are  also  strongly  corrective,  strengthening 
the  shoulder  muscles  and  broadening  the  chest.  Good  form  is  necessary 
to  produce  the  desired  result. 

4.  Trunk.  The  large  trunk  muscles  are  used,  the  back  and  the  abdominal 
walls  are  strengthened,  and  the  digestive  function  improved. 

5.  Precipitant.  Again  the  large  muscle-groups  are  used,  and  improved 
muscle-tone,  quicker  heart-action  and  deeper  breathing  should  result. 

6.  Breathing.  Respiration  should  be  brought  back  to  normal  after  the 
exertion  of  the  last  group,  and  the  habit  of  deep  breathing  encouraged. 

Directions  for  Teaching  Gymnastic  Lesson 

1.  Have  windows  open  and  coats  off ;  face  windows  for  breathing  exercises. 

2.  Insist  on  quiet  feet;  noise  and  stamping  are  unnecessary,  even  in 
street  shoes. 


48 


Physical  Education 


3.  The  lesson  must  be  memorized;  a  small  card  may  be  held  as  a 
memorandum,  but  no  teacher  can  successfully  teach  any  subject  when  she 
has  to  keep  her  attention  on  her  book. 

4.  All  breathing  exercises  are  to  be  done  with  mouths  closed. 

5.  In  correcting  poor  positions,  never  say  "shoulders  back" ;  not  the 
shoulders,  but  the  whole  trunk,  is  wrongly  poised.  Say  "chest  broad,  waist 
in,"  or  "stand  tall,  knees  straight." 

6.  Exercises  done  on  one  side  must  be  done  an  equal  number  of  times  on 
the  opposite  side. 


Incorrect   Arm    Stretching   Upward,    'With    Coat. 


7.  When  the  gymnastic  lesson  is  given  two  or  three  times  a  week,  using 
health  talks,  contests  and  rhythmic  work  on  the  alternate  days,  one  pro- 
gram is  used  for  two  weeks,  varied  with  different  games. 

8.  "Atten — tion."  Head  high ;  chest  broad ;  hands  at  side,  stretched 
downward ;  heels  together,  with  toes  slightly  turned  out,  not  more  than 
forty-five  degrees.  A  smart  and  convenient  way  for  children  to  reach  this 
position  from  their  seats  is  in  two  counts;  one,  right  (or  left)  foot  in  the 
aisle,  preparatory  to  rising;  two,  class  stands  at  "attention." 


Second  Grade 


49 


9.  "At  ease."  This  is  not  necessary  after  each  exercise,  but  may  be 
given  when  rest  is  required,  or  when  any  explanation  is  needed.  The  left 
(or  right)  foot  is  carried  about  a  foot-length  to  the  side,  weight  being 
equally  distributed  between  feet. 

10.  Every  exercise  must  begin  and  end  with  the  fundamental  standing 
position.  The  command  "  po — sition"  is  used  to  get  the  child  back  to  the 
starting  position,  from  any  gymnastic  position  of  feet  or  arms. 

11.  Demonstrate  an  unfamiliar  exercise,  but  do  not  accompany  the 
children  in  their  work;  if  the  full  educational  benefits  are  to  come  from 
the  lesson,  it  must  be  taught  from  commands,  not  from  imitation. 


Coeeect  Arm  Stretching,  Without  Coat. 


12.  Each  command  has  two  parts,  preparatory  and  executive.  The  pre- 
paratory part  explains  the  order ;  the  executive  gives  the  signal  for  its 
performance.  In  the  command  "Left  foot  forward  —  place!"  the  dash 
separates  the  preparatory  and  executive  sections.  The  preparatory  part  of 
the  command  is  given  in  an  ordinary  conversational  tone ;  a  distinct  pause 
must  always  come  before  the  executive  part,  which  is  given  in  a  crisp, 
emphatic,  decisive  manner. 


Phys.- 


50  Physical  Education 

13.  Repetition.  Arm  exercises  may  be  repeated  8  to  10  times ;  leg  exercises, 
12  to  16;  breathing,  not  more  than  five  times.  The  lesson  must  have  snap 
and  vigor.  Never  repeat  an  exercise  to  the  point  of  losing  the  interest  of 
the  class.  It  is  much  better  to  work  for  effort  and  for  good  spirit  than  to  drill 
on  an  exercise  until  every  child  can  execute  it  perfectly. 

14.  If  the  children  are  old  enough  to  have  developed  sex-consciousness, 
it  may  be  desirable  to  have  the  Physical  Education  lessons  done  with 
boys  on  one  side  of  the  room,  girls  on  the  other.  Assign  seats  for  gym- 
nastic lessons,  taller  pupils  at  rear  of  line ;  have  desks  cleared ;  command 
"change  seats  for  gymnastics,"  and  have  boys  pass  to  front  of  room,  girls 
to  rear,  in  taking  temporary  seats. 


GRADE  III 

For  Explanation  of  Types  of  Exercises,  see  pages  10,  11. 

GYMNASTICS 

General  Plan  of  Gymnastic  Lesson,  page  7/7. 
Directions  for  Teaching  Gymnastics,  pages  Jfl-50. 
Time  for  Physical  Education  should  be  divided  between  health  lessons, 
games,  gymnastics,  rhythmic  exercises,  athletic  contests,  and  efficiency  tests 
such  as  the  Badge  Tests  described  by  the  Playground  and  Recreation  Associa- 
tion bulletins.  A  new  lesson  in  gymnastics  is  to  be  started  every  two  weeks. 
Every  lesson  is  begun  and  ended  with  "Best  sitting  position." 

Lesson     I 

1.  Order.  Drill  in  directions  of  right  and  left.  "To  the  right — turn!" 
facing  each  of  the  four  sides  of  the  room. 

2.  Arm.  Hips  —  firm;  hands  placed  firmly  on  hip  bones,  not  waist  line, 
thumbs  to  the  back,  fingers  close  together.)  Po — sition  hands  brought  smartly 
down  to  sides. 

3.  Leg.  Hips  —  firm;  feet  apart  —  jump  (lightly,  catching  weight  on  balls 
of  feet);  feet  together  —  jump. 

4.  Splitting  wood ;  swing  hands  over  right  shoulder,  as  if  grasping  axe ; 
on  count  one,  swing  axe  between  feet,  bending  forward  from  hips ;  two, 
straighten  body  and   swing  hands  again   over   right  shoulder. 

Repeat  an  equal  number  of  times,  bringing  hands  to  left  shoulder. 

5.  Precipitant.  Fire  Engine.  Number  the  rows;  have  signal  given  with 
bell  or  handelapping,  and  the  row  whose  number  is  signalled  rises  and 
gallops  lightly  around  outside  aisle  and  back  to  seat. 

6.  Hands  on  lower  border  of  chest  —  place;  breathe  in,  one;  out.  two. 

Lesson     II 

1.  Order.  Touch  R  foot,  tiptoe  only,  forward  —  one;  replace  two.  Repeat 
to  left. 

2.  Arm.  Chest  —  firm;  make  two  level  shelves  by  placing  thumb  against 
chest,  palms  down  and  horizontal,  wrists  and  fingers  straight,  hands  well 
apart  on  chest.     Po  ■ —  sition. 

8.     Leg.     Hips  —  firm;  raise  heels  eight  counts  —   go. 

4.  Trunk.  Raising  Flag.  Right  hand  high  over  head,  left  in  front  of 
waist ;  pull  down  right  arm  and  bend  knees,  one;  raise  left  arm  high  and 
straighten  knees,  two. 

5.  Precipitant.  Hips  —  firm;  jump  lightly  on  toes  10  counts  —  go  (may 
be  taken  one  row  at  a  time). 

6.  Sitting,  hands  on  near  corner  of  desks,  head  high ;  deep  breathing, 
one,   (chin  drawn  in  and  chest  broadened)  ;  two. 

Lesson     III 

1.  Order.     Quick  change  between  hips  —  firm  and  chest  —  firm. 

2.  Arm.  Chest  —  firm;  fling  arms  sideways,  one  (fingers  straight,  palms 
down,  hands  shoulder  high)  ;  return,  two. 


52 


Physical  Education 


3.  Leg.     Hips  —  firm;  feet  apart  —  jump;  heels  raise,  8  counts  —  go. 

4.  Trunk.     Splitting  wood;  see  Lesson  1,   Grade  III. 

5.  Precipitant.     Hips  —  firm;  feet  apart  jump;  together  —  jump;  continue 
lightly  ten  counts  —  go.      (One  row  at  a  time.) 

6.  Raise  arms  sideways  shoulder  high  and  breathe  in  —  one;  two,  lower 
arms  and  breathe  out. 


,  Y 


' 


"Shoulders — Fiem 


Lesson     IV 


1.  Order.  Marching  in  place;  mark  time  —  go  (foot  raised  clear  of 
floor,  toe  pointing  downward)  ;  class  halt;  one  —  two.  (Two  steps  in  place 
after  the  word  halt.) 

2.  Arm.  Head — firm  (hands  on  back  of  head,  finger  tips  touching  wrists 
straight,  elbows  back,  chin  well  in). 

3.  Leg.  Hips  —  firm;  Bouncing  balls,  turning  right;  4  counts  —  go; 
(Take  three  soft  light  jumps  in  place,  hardly  leaving  floor;  turn  to  right 
on  fourth  jump.  The  first  three  are  "getting  up  steam ;"  the  fourth  jump 
is  more  vigorous. )      Again  to  right  —  go. 

4.  Trunk.  See-Saw.  Three  children  to  a  see-saw ;  the  center,  standing 
with  arms  stretched  out  at  side,  being  the  plank,  and  the  two  outer  players, 
each  holding  with   both  hands  to  the  end   of  the   see-saw,    are   the  riders. 


Third  Grade  53 

On  count  one.  the  center  player  bends  to  right,  as  the  rider  on  that  side 
bends  his  knees  almost  to  sitting  position ;  on  two,  the  right-hand  player 
stands  erect  as  the  one  on  the  left  bends  knees.  The  music  to  the 
familiar  Mother  Goose  rhyme  may  be  used  for  the  rhythm  to  this  exercise. 

5.  Precipitant.     Skip  on  tiptoe,  one  row  at  a  time,  around  room. 

6.  Hands  on  lower  ribs,  broaden  chest  and  breathe  in,  one;  two. 

Lesson     V 

1.  Order.     Quick  change  between  hips  —  firm,   chest  —  firm,   head  —  firm. 

2.  Arm.     Chest  —  firm;  fling  arms  sideways  and  raise  heels  —  one;  two. 

3.  Leg.  Hips  —  firm;  deep  knee  bending  (the  children  call  it  "growing 
little")  bend  knees,  heels  off  floor,  one;  stand  erect,  two. 

4.  Trunk.  Throwing  snowballs;  pick  up  snow  from  between  feet,  one; 
mould  balls,  two;  throw  at  some  object  in  front  of  room,  three.  A  child 
may  be  chosen  for  a  snow  man,  and  his  arms,  head  and  legs  knocked  off  in 
succession. 

5.  Precipitant.     Run  on  tiptoe,  one  row  at  a  time,  around  room. 

6.  Sitting.     Chest  —  firm;  breathe  in,  one;  out,  two. 

Lesson     VI 

1.  Order.     Review  the  march  in  place  and  halt   (see  Lesson  IV). 

Mark  time;   go;   then  forward,   march;   class   halt  —  one;   two.     Take 
two  steps  after  the  word  halt ;  bringing  heels  together  on  two. 

2.  Arm.  Circle  arms  overhead  —  one  (raise  arms  sideways  overhead  and 
place  R  hand  above  L,  both  palms  down ;  two,  lower  arms  sideways  to 
position. 

3.  Leg.     Arm  raising  sideways  with  heel  raising,  one;  two. 

4.  Trunk.  Cranking  automobile;  stoop  and  make  large  circle  outward, 
first  with  right  arm,  then  with  left. 

5.  Precipitant.  Hips  —  firm;  jump  with  feet  astride  and  together,  twelve 
counts  —  go.       (See  Lesson  III.) 

6.  Sitting.     Head  —  firm;  broaden  chest  and  breathe  in  —  one;  two. 

Lesson     VII 

1.  Order.  One  step  forward  —  one  (step  forward  on  left  foot);  tico, 
bring  up  right  foot  to  left,  heels  together. 

2.  Head  —  Arm.  Raise  right  arm  sideways,  turning  head  to  look  at  tips 
of  fingers  —  one;  return,  two.    Same  to  left. 

3.  Leg.     Chest  —  firm;    deep    knee    bending    (growing    small")    one;    two. 

4.  Trunk.     Raising  Flag.    (Lesson  2,   Grade  III.) 

5.  Precipitant.     Marching  game,  "Follow  my  Leader." 

6.  Hips  —  firm;  heel  raising  and  deep  breathing;  one;  tiro. 

Lesson     VIII 

1.  Order.     Quick  drill  in  directions,  as  in  Lesson  I. 

2.  Arm.  Shoulders  —  firm;  fists  clenched  tightly  and  held  on  outside  of 
arm,  not  touching  shoulder ;   wrists  straight ;   elbows  close  in. 

3.  Leg.     Head  —  firm;  feet  apart  —  jump;  raise  heels,  10  counts  —  go. 


54 


Physical,  Education 


"Chest — Firm  !" 


4.  Trunk.     "Crow   Hop;"    bend   knees    and   clasp   ankles;    hop   forward   6 
times  in  this  position.      (One  row  at  a  time.) 

5.  Precipitant.     "Fire  Engine;"  see  Lesson  I. 

6.  Arm  raising  sideways  and  heel  raising  with  deep  breathing  one;  two. 


Lesson     IX 


1.  Order.     Quick  cbanges  of  arm  positions,  insisting  on  good  form. 

2.  Arm.     Arm  raising  sideways,  with  head  twisting  to  R;  one;  two. 

Take  with  deep  breathing.    Repeat  to  left. 

3.  Leg.     Bouncing  Balls ;  see  Lesson  IV. 

4.  Trunk.  Feet  apart  —  jump;  bend  and  clasp  both  hands  to  L  (R) 
ankle,  one;  two.     (Keep  knees  straight.) 

5.  Precipitant.  "Crossing  the  Creek ;"  mark  with  chalk  a  space  about 
three  feet  wide  in  front  of  the  teacher's  desk ;  have  one  row  at  a  time  run 
around  outside  aisle,  jumping  across  space  marked  out. 

6.  Chest  —  firm';  heel  raising  and  deep  breathing — one;  two. 


Third  Grade 


55 


"Rabbit    Hop." 

Lesson     X 

1.  Order.  Marking  time  and  marching ;  alternate  rows  face  back  of 
room,  so  that  two  rows  of  children  march  around  one  row  of  seats. 

2.  Shoulders  —  firm-;  arms  sideways  stretch,  one  —  two. 

3.  Leg.     Arm  circling  and  heel   raising  —  one  —  tico. 

4.  Trunk.  "Rabbit  Hop;"  bend  knees  and  place  hands,  palms  down,  on 
floor  between  knees,  fingers  pointing  inward ;  advance  by  moving  hands 
forward,  then  bringing  up  feet  with  a  little  jump. 

5.  Precipitant.  "Jumping  the  Fence ;"  like  "Crossing  the  Creek,"  Lesson 
IX,  except  the  children  jump  over  a  yardstick  or  blackboard  pointer  held  about 
ten  inches  above  floor. 

6.  Sitting.  Chest  —  firm;  arm  flinging  sideways  with  deep  breathing 
one;  two. 


GAMES  AND  CONTESTS 

Finger  Circle  Race.  Draw  small  circles  on  the  board,  one  in  each  corner,  so 
that  four  children  are  running  at  a  time.  Each  child  stands  with  his 
finger  in  a  circle,  right  shoulder  to  the  board.  At  the  signal,  all  run 
around  the  room  in  the  same  direction,  each  child  touching  every  circle 
as  he  passes  it.     The  child  first  reaching  his  own  circle  wins  the  game. 

I  Spy.  One  child  is  selected  to  hide  some  small  object,  such  as  the  top  to 
an  ink  well ;  several  of  the  children  are  meanwhile  sent  out  into  the 
hall.  When  they  enter  to  search  for  the  hidden  object,  the  first  one 
who    sees   it    says,    "I    spy"    and    returns    to    his    seat,    while   the    other 


56  Physical  Education 

players  continue  to  seai'ch.  The  player  first  seeing  the  object  may  hide 
it  next  time.  It  is  advised  that  the  object  be  hidden  where  it  will  not 
be  necessary  to  move  anything  in  order  to  find  it. 

Exchange  Tag.  Children  are  seated  at  their  desks ;  one  is  chosen  to  be 
"it,"  and  stands  in  front  of  the  room.  The  teacher  calls  the  names  of  two 
pupils,  who  exchange  seats,  trying  to  avoid  being  tagged  by  "it."  The 
one  who  is  tagged  is  next  "it." 

Follow  the  Leader.  One  player  is  chosen  as  leader.  The  others  form  in 
single  file  behind  him,  and  imitate  all  that  he  does.  The  leader  may 
march,  skip,  walk  on  all  fours,  go  backward  or  sideways,  turn  around 
while  walking,  or  hop  on  one  foot ;  he  may  assume  on  the  march  any 
position  of  the  arms.  Whoever  fails  to  follow,  must  go  to  the  foot  of 
the  line. 

Going  to  Jerusalem.  Place  a  book  or  a  chalk-mark  on  one  desk.  Players 
march  in  and  out  of  aisles,  and  at  the  signal  (a  tap  on  the  bell,  or  a  clap) 
each  tries  to  secure  a  seat.  The  marked  seat  may  not  be  used.  An 
additional  seat  is  ruled  out  at  each  repetition  of  the  game. 

Eraser  Relay.  Place  an  eraser  on  the  front  desk  in  each  row.  At  the 
signal,  the  eraser  is  passed  backward  overhead,  being  touched  by  each 
child  in  succession ;  the  player  in  the  last  seat  runs  forward  with  it, 
coming  up  on  the  right-hand  side  of  the  seats ;  the  first  child  replacing 
the  eraser  on  the  front  seat  wins  for  his  row.  Each  child  then  moves 
back  one  seat,  the  player  who  has  just  run  taking  the  front  seat. 
Continue  until  every  child  has  had  a  turn  at  the  rear  seat. 

Stealing  Steps.  One  player,  standing  in  front  of  the  class,  hides  his 
eyes  and  counts  audibly  to  ten ;  a  player  in  each  aisle  has  been  chosen 
to  start  from  the  back  of  the  room  and  come  forward  as  rapidly  as 
possible,  but  must  be  motionless  when  the  one  in  front,  having  counted 
ten,  uncovers  his  eyes.  Any  player  seen  to  move  must  return  to  the 
back  of  the  room.  The  player  first  reaching  the  front  wins  one  point 
for  his  row. 

Duoks  Fly.  The  leader  calls  rapidly  "Ducks  fly,"  "Chickens  fly,"  "Robins 
fly,"  etc.,  and  children  raise  and  lower  arms  once  when  the  name  is  called 
of  some  animal  that  can  fly;  when  a  player  raises  arms  at  the  c- m- 
mand  "pigs  fly,"  he  is  caught,  and  must  take  his  seat.  The  row  having 
the  largest  number  of  players  standing  after  two  minutes  of  the  game, 
is  the  winner. 

Bird-Catcher.  A  nest  is  marked  out  in  one  corner,  a  den  in  the  opposite 
corner.  One  player  is  chosen  for  the  bird-catcher,  another  for  the 
mother-bird.  Each  row  of  players  choose  the  name  of  some  bird. 
When  the  name  of  one  row  is  called,  they  must  run  to  tag  the  rear 
wall  and  try  to  reach  the  "nest"  before  being  tagged  by  the  bird-catcher. 
Birds  tagged  must  remain  in  the  cage.  The  same  catcher  serves  through 
one  game,  unless  the  children  play  better  with  two  catchers. 

Poison  Snake,  Players  form  circle  about  a  stick  or  some  object  that  is 
"poison" ;    the  players  try,  by  means  of  pushing  or  pulling  each  other  by 


Third  Grade 


57 


the  clasped  hands,  to  make  some  player  touch  "poison,"   when  he  has 
to  drop  from  the  circle. 

Mother  May  We  Go  Out  to  Play.  One  player  is  chosen  for  the  mother, 
the  rest  are  children,  and  scatter  about;  the  mother  calls  '"Children, 
come  home" ;  the  children  answer  in  chorus,  "no,  we  won't" ;  the  mother 
calls  "I'll  send  a  bear  after  you"  ;  to  which  the  children  reply,  "we  don't 
care" ;  after  many  more  animals  have  been  threatened,  the  mother 
says  "Well,  I'll  come  myself  after  you,"  at  which  she  chases  the  children, 
who  as  fast  as  they  are  tagged  must  return  home.  The  first  player 
tagged  may  help  chase  the  others. 


RHYTHMIC    PLAYS 

Beak   Porridge  Hot.     Players  in  couples  forming  circle,   right  shoulders  to 
center.    Inside  hands  joined  with  partner. 

1.  Heel-toe  polka  around  circle.  S  measures. 

2.  Face  partner.  "Bean  porridge  hot,"  clap  hands  to  sides,  clap  own  hands, 
and  clap  both  hands  with  partners'  in  succession.  "Bean  porridge  cold," 
repeat  as  before.  "Bean  porridge  in  the  pot,"  clap  hands  to  sides,  clap 
own  hands,  Clap  R  hand  with  partners',  clap  own  hands ;  "nine  days 
old;"  clap  L  hand  with  partners',  clap  both  own  hands,  clap  both  hands 
to  partners'. 

Continue,   to  finish  chorus. 

3.  Join  both  hands,  facing  partner.  2  slides  in  line  of  direction  around 
circle ;  tap  feet  three  times.  Repeat  slides,  moving  in  opposite  direction ; 
tap  feet  three  times. 

Repeat  3. 

4.  Repeat  chorus,  fig.  2. 

BEAN   PORRIDGE 


m  gjjjjllll 


z: 


5= 


SE 


a 


? 


^i 


if* 


*Children's  Minuet. 

Children  in  couples  around  circle,  R  shoulders  to  center. 

The  step  used  throughout  is  the  "minuet  step."  touch  R  forward  and  lift 
foot  immediately ;  step  forward  on  R ;  repeat,  touching  L  and  then  stepping 
on  L. 


!Music    from   Niedlinger's    "Small    Songs    for    Small    Singers,"    by   permission. 


58 


Physical  Education 


The  4  measures  of  introductory  chords  are  in  every  case  used  for  a 
deep  and  ceremonious  curtsy,  girls  holding  skirts,  boys  R  hand  across 
chest ;  boys  bow  with  knees  straight,  bending  from  hips ;  girls  place  one  foot 
behind,  and  bend  knees  deeply,  keeping  back  straight. 

1.  Curtsy ;  theri  take  minuet  step  forward  throughout  first  verse. 

2.  Curtsy;  then  give  right  hand  to  partner  and  take  minuet  step  in 
circle  around  partner.    Keep  joined  hands  high. 

3.  Curtsy ;  then  repeat  2,  with  L  hands  joined. 

4.  Curtsy ;  then  boy  kneels,  while  girl  goes  around  him,  minuet  step, 
R  hands  joined. 

5.  Curtsy;   repeat  4,  with  L  hands  joined. 


CHILDREN'S  MINUET 

Very  quietly    (sLho) 


j    i>  j>  i  t-m 


i    jij 


w 


grown      folks,    too,_ 


And  are       go     -     ing        to 


w^^§ 


3^E 


T^f 


i=*U 


4-4M 


3        S 


f5 


r 


r 


r- 


P^ 


j  i.i     j  i,j.-=^^ 


ball- 


1  would      like         to     dance    with    you, 


^f 


Up_    and 


j     aL- 


m 


\h± 


-^P-- 


LA 


Third  Grade 


59 


dimin 


Lt    a  i  j    j  1 1 lj    j'  J>  i  j    j 


deed,,      you     dance       quite      well,_ 


Ver  -  y         light         up 


j        fz    |  J^3 


f^^ 


2 


^L± 


±k 


p 


r 


j  j    J   U     J  U     j  I'l 


wm 


on       your    feet;_ 


When  you're  tir    -      ed,    will       you     tell 


m^ 


wmm 


wm 


^m 


rTf 


feet 


jU 


U 


i 


i  If 


1 


2 


^f 


j  j  j  i  j  m 


dimin. 


m 


me,  And  we'll    rest      up  -  on       that    sea 


The  Jolly  Miller:     Traditional  North  Carolina  Foil:  Game. 

Words:  Oh— Jolly  is  the  Miller 

And   he   lives   by   the   mill 

As  the  wheel  goes  round 

With    a    right    good    will. 

One  hand  in  the  hopper 

And  the  other  in  the  sack 

As  the  boy  goes  forward 

And  the  girl  stays  back. 
Formation :     Counter-clockwise    double    circle,    boys    on    inside,    girls    on 

outside. 


60  Physical  Education 

Action :  Walk  -forward  while  singing  first  6  lines.  During  line  7  and  S  the 
boys  step  up  to  new  partner,  the  girls  remaining  in  place. 
When  they  have  learned  to  do  this,  an  extra  player  may  be 
chosen  who  stands  in  center;  as  boys  change,  this  extra  player 
tries  to  get  partner.  The  one  who  is  left  out  remaining  in  the 
center  and  trying  to  get  a  partner  next  time. 


JOLLY  IS  THE  MILLER 


P  H  '^^^i'N  jr^^ 


\Hl  Ipii  a  j  n'j  j  'J.  fj: 


Yankee  Doodle.     Players   in   couples,    R   shoulders   to   center.    Girl's   hands 
on  skirts,  boys'  on  hips.    Begin  with  foot  away  from  partner. 

'Yankee  Doodle  came  to  town."  Touch   R  heel  forward;   touch  R  toe 

backward ;  take  3  light  running  steps  forward. 

"Riding  on  a  pony ;"  repeat  above,  beginning  inside  foot. 

"He  stuck  a  feather  in  his  cap."  Skip  4  steps  forward,  beginning  outside 

foot,  lifting  knee  high. 

"And  called  him  macaroni."    Face  partner  and  curtsy. 

For  chorus,  skip  around  circle,  humming  tune. 


*  Seven   Jumps  : 

Formation :     Circle,  hands  joined,  facing  clockwise. 

Action:  Measure  1-8,  -16  skips  around   (knees  high)   clockwise. 

Measure  9-16,  16  skips  around  counter-clockwise. 

At  end  of  16th  measure  land  with  feet  together,  hands  on  hips. 

Measure  17,  raise  L  foot  suddenly. 

Measure  18,  replace  L  foot  suddenly. 

Pianist  commences  measure  1  suddenly  and  all  skip  around  as  in 

beginning. 

Measure  17,  raise  L.  foot 

Measure  18,  replace  L  foot 

Measure  17,  raise  R  foot 

Measure  18,  replace  R  foot. 


*Prom    Clark's    "Physical    Training 
published  by   Benj.   H.   Sanborn   &  Co. 


for    the    Elementary    Schools,' 
Boston.      By   permission. 


copyrighted    and 


Third  Grade 


61 


Continue  as  before  adding  one  more  repetition  of  chords  17  and  18  each 
time.    Third  time,  repeat  all  before  and  kneel  on  L  knee. 

Fourth  time  repeat  all  before  and  kneel  on  11  knee. 

Fifth  time  repeat  all  before  and  place  L  elbow  on  floor. 

Sixth  time  repeat  all  before  and  place  R  elbow  on  floor. 

Seventh  time,  repeat  all  before  and  drop  head  in  hands. 
Repeat  skips  and  finish. 


Allegro  moderate  {  J  =  9U  ) 
A 


SEVEN  JUMPS 


Bl       1 

ifoN— 1- 

1  ■       /»  * 

f**^*, 

-I6 — s     J 1- 

[  n  A 

N=r^ 

L-*l f-f- 

-P — 1» — J — u 

9 

p       LuJJ 

10 

H     i 

-C — P— «— 4- 

11 

^-•— « — 

12 

■1 >— 

r* W      1 

13 

3 Est 

14 

WkoJ 

15 

^4 — f 1 — 

4-4 - — 

s*        ir 

4 = — 

1           1 

Continue  thus  7  limes, 

adding  a  measure  each  time 


Fine 


D.C. 


D.C. 


D.C. 


*Nixie    Polka.     Players    in    circle,    facing    center ;    three    or    more    players 
in  center.     All  hands  on  hips. 

1.  Spring,  placing  R  foot  forward,  heel  down,  toe  up ;  repeat  L.,  R.,  L„, 
4   measures. 

2.  All  clap  on  first  note  of  next  measure,  then  players  in  center  run  12  tiny 
steps  to  face  partner. 

3.  Repeat  1,  facing  partner. 

4.  Players  with  backs  to  center  turn  to  face  center  on  the  clap ;  his 
partner  follows,  hands  on  shoulders  of  the  one  ahead.  The  two  run  in 
this  manner  to  face  new  partner,  and  the  game  proceeds  until  all  have 
been  chosen. 


*Frora    Clark's    "Physical    Training    for    the    Elementary    Schools,"    copyrighted    and 
published  by  Eenj.   H.    Sanborn   Co.,   Boston.      By   permission. 


62 


Physical  Education 


NIXIE  POLKA 

Swedish 


frM-ju^iijiiJ  j  iM  RhH 


Come,lit- tie  gob-lins,come  and  play,  Come      let    us  sing  and    be       jol   -  ly. 
5     ,  6  ,        ,  7       _  *         8 


^pj     | 


M 


pips 


Sing  a   Song   o'    Sixpence.     Players   in   circle,    facing   center ;   four   players, 
in  the  "pie,"  crouch  in  center  of  circle,  close  together. 
"Sing  a  song  o'  sixpence,  a  pocket  full  of  rye; 

Four  and  twenty  blackbirds  baked  in  a  pie."     Circle  skips  to  left. 
"When  the  pie  was  opened  the  birds  began  to  sing,"  etc.     Circle  stands 
and  raises  joined  hands  to  open  "pie,"  blackbirds  fly  under  the  raised 
arms,  and  skip  around  outside  circle,  whistling. 

"The  King  was  in  his  counting-house,"  etc. ;  circle  pantomimes  counting 
money. 

"The  Queen,"  etc. ;  players  in  circle  pantomime  eating  with  spoon. 
"The   maid,"  etc. ;   players  pantomime  hanging  clothes. 
"And  down  came  a  blackbird,"  etc. ;  each  blackbird,  on  outside  of  circle, 
snips  the  nose  of  some  player  in  the  circle,   who  becomes  a  blackbird 
when  the  game  is  repeated. 


m 


SING  A  SONG  O'  SIXPENCE 


iO^U 


^^yn^rM^yi'V 


#FF? 


£££ 


^fpW  V 


5 


rpirr 


The  Spielman.     Partners  in  circle.  R  shoulders  to  center. 

1.  "We  are  two  musicians  gay,  would  you  like  to  hear  us  play? 
If  you  like  us  we  will  stay,  or  go  back  to  cold  Norway." 
Players  march  around  circle,  swinging  hands  gaily,  singing  the  above 
verse. 


Third  Grade 


63 


"We  can  play  the  viol,  viol,  violin  ; 
We  can  play  the  big  bass  viol  and  the  flute,  oh." 

Flayers    face    each    other    and    imitate    the    movements    of   playing    the 
instruments  named  in  the  preceding  verse. 
"Boom-fa-la-la,  boom-fa -la-la,  boom-fa-la-la-lay; 
Boom-fa-la-la,  boom-fa-la-la,  boom-fa-la-la-lay." 

While  singing  the  preceding,  players  in  sets  of  4  join  4  right  hands  across 
square,  and  skip  around  to  R  during  4  measures ;  reverse,  joining  L 
hands  and  skip  4  measures  to  left. 


THE  SPIELMAN 
Swedish 


GRADE  IV 

For  Explanation  of  Types  of  Exercises,  see  pages  10,  11. 

Time  for  Physical  Education  should  be  divided  between  health  lessons, 
games,  gymnastics,  rhythmic  exercises,  athletic  contests,  and  such  efficiency 
tests  as  the  Badge  Tests  arranged  by  the  Playground  and  Recreation  Asso- 
ciation. A  new  lesson  in  gymnastics  is  to  be  started  every  two  weeks.  Every 
lesson  is  begun  and  ended  with  "Best  Sitting." 

GYMNASTICS 

General  Plan  of  Gymnastic  Lesson,  page  .'ft. 
Directions  for  Teaching  Gymnastics,  pages  Jf7-50. 

Lesson     I 

1.  Order.  Hips — firm;  one  step  forward  —  march  (see  Lesson  7,  Grade 
III). 

2.  Arm.     Chest  —  firm,;  arms  sideways  fling  and  raise  heels,  one;  tioo. 

3.  Leg.  "Thread  the  needle ;"  clasp  hands  low  in  front ;  on  count  one, 
step  R  (L)  foot  through  ring  formed  by  hands,  and  stand  on  R  foot;  two, 
step  through  ring  with  left  foot,  and  stand  erect,  hands  still  clasped  behind. 

4.  Trunk.     ''Cranking  automobile;"   see   Grade  III,   Lesson  6. 

5.  Precipitant.  Running  in  place,  raising  feet  backward ;  16  counts  —  go. 
(Like  a  quick  run  but  done  without  moving  forward.   Insist  on  good  rhythm.) 

6.  Hands  on  lower  ribs  —  place;  breathe  in,  one;  out,  two. 

Lesson     II 

1.  Order.  Two  steps  forward  — <  march.  This  takes  three  counts,  stepping 
forward  L  and  R  on  one  and  two,  and  bringing  heels  together  on  three. 

2.  Arm.  Shoulders  —  firm;  stretch  arms  downward  and  raise  heels,  one; 
tioo. 

3.  Leg.     Raise  arms  sideways  and  bend  knees    (slightly)    one;  two. 

4.  Trunk.     "See-saw."  See  Lesson  IV,  Grade  III. 

5.  Precipitant.  "Jumping  Jack ;"  on  one,  jump  to  stride  position  and  raise 
arms  sideways ;  tioo.  return  arms  and  feet  to  place.     Continue  12  counts. 

6.  Circle  arms  overhead  with  deep  breathing;  one;  tioo. 

Lesson     III 

1.  Order.     March  steps  forward  and  backward ;  vary  number  and  direction. 

2.  Arm.  Chest  —  firm;  fling  arms  sideways  and  twist  head  to  R  (L)  — 
one;   two. 

3.  Leg.  "Thread  the  needle;"  (See  Lesson  I.  Grade  IV)  and  return  to 
starting  position,  reversing  the  movement. 

4.  Trunk.     Bending  to  grasp  L  (R)  ankle;  one;  tioo. 

5.  Precipitant.  Bend  arms  to  athletes'  running  position  (elbows  at  right 
angles,  held  close  to  body)  ;  run  in  place,  one  row  at  a  time,  16  counts  —  go. 

6.  Sitting;  head — firm;  deep  breathing,  one;  two. 


Fourth  Gkade 


65 


Lesson     IV 

1.  Order.     Quick  changes  of  arm  positions. 

2.  Arm.     Hand   clapping  overhead  with   heel  raising,    10  counts  —  go. 

3.  Leg.  Hands  clasped  behind  back,  place;  slow  deep  knee  bending,  one; 
two.     Try  to  touch  floor  with  finger  tips  without,  tipping  body  backward. 

4.  Trunk.  "Human  Wicket;"  feet  apart  —  jump;  bend  forward,  knees 
straight,  and  touch  L  hand  in  front  of  L  toe.  R  hand  in  front  of  R  toe 
—  one;  stand  erect,  two. 

5.  Precipitant.     "Crossing  the  Creek,"  see  Lesson  IX,  Grade  III. 

6.  Arms  sideways  —  raise;  turn  palms  up.  with  deep  breathing,  one;  two. 


Deep  Knee  Bend 


Lesson     V 

1.  Order.  Hips  —  firm;  place  L  foot  forward  (one  foot-length;  weight  on 
both  feet)  one;  two. 

2.  Arm.  Chest  —  firm;  arm  flinging  sideways  and  quick  knee  bending, 
one;  two. 

3.  Leg.  "High-stepping  horses;"  hips  —  firm ;  mark  time  in  place,  with 
high  knee  bending  upward;  12  counts- — go.  (Bring  knee  as  high  as  hip; 
right  angle  at  knee;  toe  pointing  downward.) 

Phis. — 5 


66  Physical  Education 

4.  Trunk.     "Rabbit  Hop."     See  Lesson  10,  Grade  III. 

5.  Precipitant.  "Jumping  Jack;"  clapping  bands  over  bead  on  odd  counts, 
bringing  hands  to  side  on  even  counts.     12  counts  —  go. 

6.  Shoulders  —  firm;  deep  breathing,  one;  two. 

Lessor      VI 

1.  Order.  Hips  —  firm;  L  (R)  foot  forward  —  place;  raise  heels,  S  counts, 
go. 

2.  Head.     Circle  arms  and  twist  head  to  right   (left),  one;  two. 

3.  Arm.  Shoulders- —  firm;  feet  apart  —  jump;  stretch  arms  upward,  one; 
(arms  parallel,  palms  turned  in;  watch  for  hollow  back  and  protruding 
abdomen)  ;  bring  arms  to  shoulders  firm  —  two. 

4.  Leg.  "Wicket  Walk"  (see  "Human  Wicket,"  Lesson  IV,  Grade  IV)  ; 
feet  apart  —  jump;  bend  and  touch  floor  —  two;  advance  L  foot  and  hand 
simultaneously,  then  R ;  continue  for  6  counts  ;  position  —  stand. 

5.  Precipitant.  Arms  in  running  position  —  place  (see  Lesson  III,  Grade 
IV)  ;  running  around  room,  one  row  at  a  time.  go. 

6.  Sitting.  Hips  —  firm;  deep  breathing,  with  head  bending  slightly  back- 
ward (chin  close  to  neck;  secure  broadening  of  chest,  not  raising  shoulders). 

Lesson     VII 

1.  Order.     March  steps  forward  and  backward ;  vary  number  and  direction. 

2.  Arm.  Shoulders  —  firm;  stretch  arms  sideways  and  raise  heels,  one; 
two. 

3.  Leg.  Deep  knee  bending,  hands  clasped  behind  (see  Lesson  IV,  Grade 
IV). 

4.  Trunk.  "Climbing  Ladder."  On  count  one,  raise  L  arm  as  if  grasping 
ladder,  and  bend  left  knee  upward;  two;  change  position  of  hands  and  feet, 
bringing  R  arm  and  knee  upward. 

5.  Precipitant.  "Jumping  Jack,"  with  hands  clapping  overhead  (Lesson  V, 
Grade  IV)  ;  16  counts- — go. 

6.  "West  Point"  Breathing ;  one.  deep  breathing,  turning  palms  outward, 
keeping  little  finger  close  to  side  (see  that  the  exercise  secures  chest  broad- 
ening, not  shoulder  raising)  ;  return  and  exhale,  two. 

Lesson     VIII 

1.  Order.  Facing  to  right  —  one  (quarter-turn  to  R  on  R  heel,  pushing 
with  L  toe;  hold  this  position  until  second  command)  ;  bring  up  L  foot  to  R, 
heels  together,  two. 

2.  Arm.     Arm  circling  overhead  with  heel  raising,  12  counts  —  go. 

3.  Leg.     "Thread  the  Needle"  and  return ;  see  Lesson  III,  Grade  IV. 

4.  Trunk.     "Splitting  wood;"  see  Lesson  III,  Grade  III. 

5.  Precipitant.  Hips  — firm;  jump  in  place ;  bend  knees,  heels  off  floor, 
one;  spring  upward  and  land  on  toes  with  knees  bent  as  in  starting  position, 
two;  stand  erect,  three. 

6.  Sitting.  Chest  —  firm;  deep  breathing  with  head  bending  backward, 
one;  two.     (See  Lesson  VI,     Grade  IV.) 


Fourth  Grade  67 

Lesson     IX 

1.  Order.     Right  and  left  facing   (see  Lesson  VIII,  Grade  V). 

2.  Arm.     Hand  clapping  overhead  with  heels  raising,  12  counts  —  go. 

3.  Leg.  Hips  —  firm!  high  knee  bending  upward,  march  time,  16  counts  — 
go. 

4.  Trunk.  "Steamboat;"  arms  sideways  raise  and  feet  apart  —  jump;  on 
one,  bend  trunk  to  R,  bending  R  knee,  R  hand  touching  floor,  L  arm  pointing 
upward ;  two,  bend  to  L,  touching  floor  with  L  hand. 

5.  Precipitant.     Practice  marching  and  halting. 

6.  West   Point   breathing,    one;    tiro. 

Lesson     X 

1.  Order.  Head  Arm  and  L  (R)  foot  forward  —  place;  heel  raising  8 
counts  —  go. 

2.  Arm.  Arm  stretching  sideways  and  upward ;  shoulders  —  firm;  stretch 
arms  sideways  —  one;  shoulders  firm,  two;  stretch  arms  upward,  three; 
to  shoulders,  four. 

3.  Leg.  Chest  —  firm;  deep  knee  bending,  one;  two  (see  Grade  III,  Lesson 
V). 

4.  Trunk.  Climbing  ladder ;  raise  L  arm  and  R  knee  upward ;  change 
and  continue  to  10  counts. 

5.  Precipitant.  Hips — -firm;  jump  in  place,  one;  two,  three.  (See  Lesson 
VIII,  Grade  IV.) 

6.  Arms  sideways  —  fling;  deep  breathing,  turning  palms  upward, one;  two. 

GAMES 

Automobile  Race  :  Each  row  chooses  the  name  of  some  automobile.  At 
the  signal,  the  first  child  in  each  alternate  row  rises  on  the  right  side, 
runs  forward  around  his  own  desk,  then  to  the  rear  on  the  left  side, 
going  completely  around  his  own  row  of  seats.  As  soon  as  he  is 
seated,  he  touches  off  the  child  who  sits  behind  him.  and  so  on  until 
the  last  child  has  run  and  has  returned  to  his  seat.  Tl:o  alternate  rows 
then  play,  and  the  two  winners  finally  compete  to  decide  the  champion. 

Posture  Tag  :  One  child  is  chosen  for  the  runner,  and  another  for  the 
chaser.  Each  has  a  beand)ag  carried  on  his  head.  If  either  player 
touches  or  loses  the  bean4L>ag,  he  is  out.  and  must  choose  a  player  to  take 
his  place.  If  the  runner  is  tagged  by  the  chaser,  another  runner  is 
chosen. 

Teacher  and  Class  :  A  leader  is  chosen  for  a  "class"  of  about  ten  players, 
the  "class"  in  a  line  facing  the  "teacher,"  who  stands  about  twelve  feet 
away.  The  "teacher"  tosses  the  bean  bag  to  each  of  the  class  in  succession, 
beginning  at  the  head.  A  player  who  misses  goes  to  the  foot.  If  the 
leader  misses,  he  goes  to  the  foot  and  the  player  at  the  head  becomes 
leader. 

Beast,  Bird  or  Fish  :  The  leader  tosses  the  bean  bag  to  any  player,  and 
calls  "Bird."  then  immediately  begins  to  count  rapidly  to  ten.  If  the 
player  to  whom  the  bean  bag  was  tossed  does  not  name  a  bird  before 
the  leader  counts  ten,  he  is  caught,  and  must  stand  at  the  back  of  the 


68  Physical  Education 

room.    If  the  leader  calls  for  "fish,"  or  for  "beast,"  the  correct  reply  must 
be  given. 

Weather  Vane  :  This  is  a  useful  game  for  teaching  points  of  the  compass. 
It  is  played  like  "Simon  Says;"  the  teacher  calls  "Turn  to  the  —  North," 
and  a  child  who  turns  in  the  wrong  direction  is  an  unreliable  weather- 
vane,  and  must  take  his  seat.  Give  a  good  pause  before  the  direction 
is  announced,  and  demand  instantaneous  response. 

Lame  Fox  and  Chickens  :  The  chickens  are  divided  into  two  groups,  stand- 
ing on  opposite  sides  of  the  playing  space ;  a  den  for  the  fox  is  marked  out 
in  the  center.  At  the  signal,  the  chickens  exchange  bases,  running 
across  the  space  marked  out  for  the  fox ;  the  fox  who  is  lame  and  can  hop 
only  on  one  foot,  tries  to  tag  as  many  as  he  can.  All  caught  are  lame 
foxes  when  the  signal  again  is  given. 

Center  Base  :  Players  in  circle ;  one  player  in  center  with  ball.  The  center 
player  throws  ball  to  some  player  in  the  circle,  who  must  replace  ball  in 
the  center  and  then  chase  the  center  player,  who  is  safe  if  he  can 
touch  the  ball  before  he  is  tagged  by  the  chaser;  if  he  is  tagged,  the 
chaser  may  be  in  the  center. 

Call  Ball  :  Players  are  given  consecutive  numbers,  beginning  at  one. 
One  player  has  a  basket  ball,  which  he  tosses  into  the  air  immediately 
after  he  has  called  a  player's  number ;  that  player  runs  forward  and 
tries  to  catch  the  ball  before  it  has  made  a  second  bounce.  As  a 
playground  game,  the  players  stand  in  circle ;  in  the  schoolroom,  players 
are  in  their  seats,  and  the  ball  is  tossed  in  the  vacant  space  at  the 
front  of  the  room. 

Fish  Net  :  Two  goal  lines  are  drawn  some  forty  to  fifty  feet  apart  and 
reaching  from  side  to  side  of  the  play  space.  The  players  are  aligned  on 
one  of  the  goal  lines.  One  player,  the  "Net,"  stands  on  the  opposite  goal 
line.  At  the  call,  "The  Net  is  coming!"  all  move  forward  to  the  opposite 
goal,  while  the  "Net"  tries  to  catch  a  "Fish"  by  throwing  his  arms  around 
him.  The  one  caught  joins  hands  with  him  on  the  opposite  goal  line. 
The  "Net"  again  gives  his  warning,  and  as  the  "Fish"  swim  to  the  other 
side,  another  one  is  caught  by  the  "Net,"  now  consisting  of  two  players ; 
encircling  him  and  grasping  hands,  they  take  him  to  the  goal,  where  he 
joins  the  net.  As  the  net  becomes  longer,  several  fish  may  be  caught  at 
one  time.  The  last  one  caught  is  the  "Net"  for  the  next  game.  If  the 
catchers  let  go  of  hands  the  net  is  broken  and  those  in  it  are  released. 

Bull  Frog  Relay  :  Pupils  in  columns  or  file  formation  arranged  according  to 
size  and  equal  in  number.  After  player  has  completed  his  turn  in  racing, 
he  must  pass  by  way  of  left  side  of  team  to  the  rear  and  place  hands  on 
shoulders  of  team  mate  in  front  observing  complete  silence  and  perfect 
alignment. 
Position  of  individuals  when  in  action. 
Hands  on  hips ;  deep  knee  bend. 

Flying  Dutchman  :     Formation :     Sitting  on  desks  facing  back  of  room. 

One  who  is  chosen  to  be  "it"  stands  facing  players  with  a  book  in  his 
hand.     At  a  signal  from  the  teacher,  "it"  hands  the  book  to  a  player, 


Fourth  Grade 


69 


the  class  then  count  aloud  as  the  book  is  passed  to  the  first  five  players. 
At  the  word  "five"  the  one  "it"  chases  the  book.  The  book  may  be  passed 
up  and  down  or  across  the  room.  If  the  chaser  catches  the  book  the 
last  one  catching  it  is  "it."    Any  one  dropping  the  book  is  "it." 

Suggestions :    Emphasize  the  fact  that  clever  players  are  not  caught,  as 
children  like  to  be  "it"  and  may  be  caught  purposely. 

INDIAN  WAR  DANCE 


P 


ttfc 


SZj 


-9     0     » 


S 


4     m    * 


f*Pffeff=  Uii'iv&&E& 


A 


m 


13 


I    i 


=J= 


?=5 


pwj 


~¥±^U4^±^ 


± 


wu  i  hh3  i  i  i  ^ 


g  ".Hiji^-^j^^  p  |  ^  | 


P  1 1    iliP 


^m 


-t 


B 


i  l  ■  i      > 1 ' — » j  .I      —         <■ 


^ 


,   a  i   . 


y^^H^ 


70 


Physical  Education 


RHYTHMIC    PLAYS 


Indian  War  Dance  : 


Formation 
Part     I. 


Sitting  on  floor  facing  in,   arms  folded  high. 


Part  II. 


(a)     Bend  forward  and  back  four  times  (1-8),  (four  measures). 
(6)     Bend  right  and  left  alternately  (1-8),   (Measures  five,  six, 
seven,  eight.) 

(c)  Raise  arms  high  and  look  up  four  times  (repeat  measures 
one  to  four.) 

(d)  Look  right,  hand  over  eyes,  four  times  right,  with  hand 
over  eyes,  four  times  left  (measures  nine  to  sixteen.) 

(e)  Smoke    pipe    four    times    (repeat    measures    thirteen    to 
sixteen.) 

Jump  up.  run  around  circle,  little  jumpy  steps,  arms  alternately 
raised  sharply,  starting  at  beginning  of  piece.  When  measure 
seventeen  is  reached,  strike  floor  twice,  and  on  measure  eighteen 
yell  three  times  putting  hand  over  mouth  after  each  yell  is 
started. 

Repeat  striking  floor  and  yelling  on  measures  nineteen  and 
twenty,  twenty-five  and  twenty-six,  twenty-seven  and  twenty- 
eight,  running  on  all  measures  between. 


♦The  Crested  Hen  : 

Formation :  This  is  done  in  groups  of  three,  each  consisting  of  one  boy 
and  two  girls,  or  two  boys  and  one  girl.  The  groups  stand  in  circle 
formation. 

I.  Measures  1-S.  The  players  join  hands  and  dance  around  to  the  left 
as  follows :  Step  forward  on  the  left  foot,  hop,  and  swing  the  right 
foot  forward.  The  players  all  lean  away  from  the  center  of  the  circle. 
A  stamp  is  taken  on  the    first  note  of  the  first  measure. 


Allegretto 


THE  CRESTED  HEN 

Swedish 


P^m 


nn 


^ 


m 


m 


i 


m 


m 


m 


in 


^ 


m 


m 


m 


m 


£E 


m 


m 


w 


is 


10 


12 


13 


14 


15 


16 


*Prom    Clark's    "Physical    Training    for    the    Elementary    Schools,"    copyrighted     and 
published   by   Benj.    H.   Sanborn   &    Co.,    Boston.      By   permission. 


Fourth  Grade 


71 


Measures  1-S.  Repeat  the  same  step  to  the  right.  Jump  up  in  the  air  on 
the  first  note  of  the  first  measure,  come  clown  on  both  feet,  and  repeat 
step  hop  to  the  right. 

II.  Measures  9-10.  The  girls  drop  their  joined  hands,  place  the  free 
hands  on  hips,  and  form  a  straight  line.  The  boy  at  no  time  breaks 
bis  grasp.  The  players  continue  the  step,  hopping  in  place  while  the 
girl  on  the  right  bends  forward  and  does  step-hop  under  the  archway 
formed  by  the  raised  arms  of  the  boy  and  the  left  girl. 

Measures  11-12.     The  boy  follows  the  girl,  turning  under  his  own  arms. 

Measures  13-14.  The  left  girl  turns  under  the  arcbway  formed  by  the 
boy  and  the  right  girl. 

Measures  15-16.     The  boy  follows. 

Measures  9-16.     Repeat  the.  step. 

Repeat  tbe  play  from  the  beginning. 


French  May  Dance  : 

In  couples,  forming  double  circle;  rigbt  sboulders  to  center, 
joined  ;  boys,  outside  on  hip,  girls,  holding  skirts. 


Inside  hands 


Run    forward    6    steps    (2    meas.)  ;    face   partner    and    curtsy, 
2  measures. 

Repeat  step  1,  in  opposite  direction ;  4  measures. 
Facing  partner,  R  hands  joined  high;  cross  to  partner's  place 
with  3  running  steps  (1  measure) , curtsy  (1  measure). 
Repeat  3,  returning  to  own  place  and  curtsy  (2  measures). 
Inside  partner  (girl)  stands  still,  while  boy  turns  under  their 
joined  hands,  making  complete  turn;  (1  measure)  ;  boy  runs  3 
steps  to  left  (1  measure),  meeting  new  partner;  both  curtsy 
(2  measures)  ;  repeat  from  beginning  witb  new  partner. 


FRENCH  MAY  DANCE 


4w(  jiP~3-H!  i  :  4 


m 


fi^-TO+fflU^ 


mm 


m 


»F-}\m 


m  g 


fe-M 


m 


«■ 


as  I  i  i 


m 


i=*=^ 


w& 


^~\  &$ 


5E 


f=fg=f— f- 


72 


Physical  Education 


Gtjstaf's  Skoal.*  -  (Gustafs  Health)  Swedish  Kinging  Game. 

Formation.  Four  couples  form  a  square.  Head  couples  stand  facing  each 
other  about  six  feet  apart,  while  side  couples  do  the  same.  Partners 
join  inside  hands.  The  boy  stands  on  the  left  with  free  hand  on  hip, 
while  the  girl  takes  hold   of  her  skirt. 

I.  Measure  1-2.  The  head  couples  start  with  the  right  foot,  and  ad- 
vance toward  each  other  with  three  steps.  On  the  second  count  of 
the  second  measure  the  boy  bows  and  the  girl  makes  a  peasant  curtsey. 

Measure  3-4.  The  head  couples  start  with  the  left  foot,  and  retire  with 
three  steps,  bringing  the  feet  together  on  the  second  count  of  the  fourth 
measure. 

Measures  5-6.     Same  as  measures  1-2. 

Measures  7-8.     Same  as  measures  3-4. 

Measures  1-S.     The  side  couples  repeat  same  figures. 

The  above  figure  should  be  performed  with  great  dignity. 

II.  Measures  9-12.  The  head  couples  skip  gaily  toward  each  other,  taking 
two  skip  steps  to  a  measure.  Partners  release  hands,  separate,  and  join 
inside  hands  with  person  opposite,  the  boy  going  to  the  left  and  the  girl 
to  the  right.  The  new  couple  passes  under  the  arch  made  by  the  joined 
hands  of  the  side  couples.  (Joined  hands  should  be  held  high.)  As  soon  as 
they  have  passed  under  the  arch,  they  separate  to  the  left  and  right, 
returning  to  their  original  places. 

Measures  13-16.  Still  skipping,  they  clap  their  own  hands,  join  hands  with 
partners,  lean  well  away  from  each  other  and  swing  about  with  high 
skipping  steps. 

Measures  9-16.     The  side  couples  repeat  same  figure. 

There  are  great  dramatic  possibilities  in  this  game.  The  first  part 
represents  paying  homage  to  a  superior,  while  the  second  is  an  imitation 
of  the  gay  life  of  the  peasant,  even  though  passing  under  a  yoke  of 
subjection. 


ft 


fcfc 


GUSTAF'S   SKOAL 
Swedish  Singing  Game 


^ 


in 


m 


^5 


m=2 


rr 


K§ 


m 


m 


i 


i 


i 


mm 


fc=^ 


*From    Clark's    "Physical    Training    for    the    Elementary    Schools"    copyrighted    and 
published  by  Benj.  H.   Sanborn  &  Co.,  Boston.     By  permission. 


GRADE  V 

For  Explanation  of  Types  of  Exercises,  see  pages  10,  11. 

GYMNASTICS 

General  Plan  of  Gymnastic  Lesson,  page  1ft. 
Directions  for  Teaching  Gymnastics,  pages  lft-50. 

Lesson  I 

1.  Order.  Review  facings  (see  Lesson  VIII,  Grade  IV)  and  foot  placing 
forward  and  to  side  (Lesson  V,  Grade  IV). 

2.  Arm.  (a)  Review  quick  changes  of  arm  positions;  (6)  review  arm 
stretchings  in  various  directions. 

3.  Leg.  Chest  —  firm;  arm  flinging  sideways  with  quick  knee  bending,  one; 
two. 

4.  Trunk.  "Piston  rod";  on  one,  take  shoulders  firm  and  bend  L  (R)  knee 
upward ;  two,  stretch  arms  downward  and  replace  foot,  16  counts.  Demand 
smooth  vigorous  action. 

5.  Precipitant.  Arms  in  running  position, —  place;  run  in  place  16  counts 
—  go. 

6.  West  Point  breathing  (see  Lesson  VII,  Grade  IV)  one;  tico. 

Lesson  II 

1.  Order.  Review  mark  time  and  halt  (Lesson  IV,  Grade  III)  and  one 
(two)  march  steps  forward  and  back. 

2.  Arm.  Shoulders  firm  and  feet  apart — jump;  arm  stretching  upward, 
one;  two;  sideways,  three;  four.  (Hold  each  position  long  enough  to  be 
sure  of  good  form.) 

3.  Leg.  Hands  behind  body — clasp;  deep  knee  bending,  one;  two.  (Try 
to  touch  floor  without  tipping  backward.) 

4.  Trunk.     "Steamboat"   (see  Lesson    IX.  Grade  IV). 

5.  Precipitant.  Hips — firm  and  left  foot  forward — place;  heels — raise; 
spring,  reversing  position  of  feet,  tivo;  continue  in  rhythm,  12  counts,  go. 

6.  Sitting.     Head — firm;  deep  breathing,  one;  two. 

Lesson  III 

1.  Order.  Three  steps  forward — march  (four  counts;  heels  together  on 
fourth  count). 

2.  Arm.     Left  hand  on  hip  and  right  on  head — place;  quickly,  change. 

3.  Leg.  Left  (R)  foot  forward — place;  heel  raising  with  hand  clapping 
over  head,  12  counts  —  go. 

4.  Trunk.  "Jack-knife  Dive" ;  on  count  one,  place  right  foot  sideways 
and  fling  arms  sideways ;  two,  bend  to  touch  floor  between  feet,  keeping  knees 
straight ;  thred,  stand  erect,  arms  stretched  sideways ;  four,  hands  at  sides 
and  feet  together. 

5.  Precipitant.  Hips — firm;  jump  in  place,  one;  two;  three  (Lesson  VIII, 
Grade  IV). 

6.  Deep  breathing,  arm  raising  sideways  and  heel  raising;  one;  two. 


74  Physical  Education 

Lesson  IV 

1.  Order.  Hips — firm;  place  L  (R)  foot  forward  and  return,  4  counts,  go~ 
continue  through  16  counts ;  go. 

2.  Arm.  With  palms  upward,  arms  sideways  fling  and  feet  apart — jump; 
raise  arms  upward,  one;  two.     (See  that  children  do  not  hollow  backs.) 

3.  Leg.  Head — firm;  fling  arms  sideways  with  quick  knee  bending,. 
one;  two. 

4.  Trunk.    Piston  rod    (see  Lesson  I,  Grade  IV). 

5.  Precipitant.  Hands  in  running  position — place;  run  around  room;  halt 
in  four  counts. 

6.  West  Point  breathing,  one;  two. 

Lesson  V 

1.  Order.     Review  facing,  right  and  left. 

2.  Arm.  Raise  arms  sideways  and  twist  head  to  right  (L),  with  deer> 
breathing ;  one;  two. 

3.  Leg.     Chest — firm;    high    knee    bending    upward,    16    counts — go. 

4.  Trunk.  "Fire-cracker."  Clap  hands  in  front  of  chest,  one;  clap  over- 
head, two;  bend  forward  and  slap  knees,  mid-leg,  and  ankle,  in  quick  succes- 
sion, one,  two,  three  (keep  knees  straight). 

5.  Precipitant.  Hips — firm;  left  (R)  foot  forward — place;  spring  on  toes,, 
changing  feet  forward  and  back,  12  counts  —  go. 

6.  Hands  on  lower  ribs — place;  deep  breathing,  one;  two. 

Lesson  VI 

1.  Order.  One,  two,  three  or  four  steps  forward — march  (four  steps  takes 
5  counts). 

2.  Arm.  Shoulders — firm;  stretch  arms  sideways,  one;  two;  stretch  arms 
downward,  three;  four.    Repeat  in  4  counts— go. 

3.  Leg.  "Signalling" ;  raise  left  leg  and  right  arm  sideways,  one;  replace, 
two;  right  arm  and  right  leg,  three;  return,  -four. 

4.  Trunk.  Hips  firm  and  feet  apart — jump;  twist  trunk  to  left,  one;  for- 
ward, two   (twist  should  come  from  waist  only). 

5.  Precipitant.  Jump  in  place  with  arm  flinging  sideways,  one;  two  (fling 
arms  sideways  on  jump,  and  bring  again  to  side  on  landing)  ;  three  (Lesson 
VIII,  Grade  IV). 

6.  Head  firm  and  feet  apart — jump;  deep  breathing,  one;  two. 

Lesson  VII 

1.  Order.  Hips — firm;  place  left  foot  forward,  one;  raise  heels,  two;  lower 
heels,  three;  foot  replace,  four.    Repeat  with  opposite  foot,  4  counts — go. 

2.  Arm.  With  palms  up,  arms  sideways  fling  and  feet  apart — jump;  raise 
arms  upward,  one;  two. 

3.  Chest — firm;  quick  knee  bending  with  arms  flinging  sideways,  one;  two. 

4.  Trunk.     "Jack-knife  dive"  (see  Lesson  III,  Grade  V). 

5.  Precipitant.  Forward — march;  tiptoe  march;  normal  march;  class 
— halt. 

6.  Sitting;  circle  arms  over  head  with  deep  breathing;  one;  two. 


Fifth  Grade  75 

Lesson  VIII. 

1.  Order.    Right  (L)  face  and  one  step  forward — march  (done  in  4  counts). 

2.  Arm.  Shoulders  firm  and  feef  apart — jump;  arm  stretching  upward  and 
downward,  4  counts,  go. 

3.  Leg.     Head — firm;  slow  deep  knee  bending,  one;  two. 

4.  Trunk.     "Steamboat"' :   see  Lesson  IX,  Grade  IV. 

5.  Precipitant.  Jump  on  toes  to  stride  position  and  return,  with  hand 
clapping  overhead    (see  Lesson  V,   Grade  IV),  16  counts — go. 

6.  West  Point  breathing,   one;   two. 

Lesson  IX 

1.  Order.  Chest — firm;  foot  placing  forward  and  heel  raising,  left  and 
right ;  S  counts — go. 

2.  Arm.  Shoulders — firm;  arm  stretching  upward,  sideways  and  down- 
ward. 6  counts — go. 

3.  Leg.  "Knee  Dip";  stand  on  left  (R)  foot;  reach  behind  and  grasp 
left  (R)  foot  with  right  (L)  hand;  bend  left  (R)  knee  slowly  until  right  £L) 
knee  touches  floor ;  raise  slowly  to  erect  position.  The  free  arm  may  be  raised 
sideways  to  aid  balance. 

4.  Trunk.     "Fire-cracker"' ;  see  Lesson  V.  Grade  V. 

5.  Precipitant.  Hips — firm;  jump  in  place  with  quarter  turn  to  right  (L), 
one;  two  (land  facing  to  right  or  left)  ;  three. 

6.  Sitting ;  Head — firm;  bend  head  slightly  backward  with  deep  breathing, 
one;  two. 

Lesson  X 

1.  Order.  Right  (L)  face  and  two  steps  forward — march  (done  in  5 
counts) . 

2.  Arm.    Shoulders — firm;  stretch  arms  upward  and  bend  knees,  one;  tico. 

3.  Leg.     "Signalling" ;  see  Lesson  VI,  Grade  V. 

4.  Trunk.  Feet  apart — jump;  circle  arms  overhead  and  twist  trunk  to 
right  (L)  one;  two. 

5.  Precipitant.  Left  foot  forward — place;  spring  changing  feet  forward 
and  back,  and  raising  arms  to  shoulder  level  on  odd  counts,  down  on  even 
counts — go    (16  counts). 

6.  West  Point  breathing,  one;  two. 

GAMES 

Paetner  Tag.  The  children  are  seated  at  their  desks.  A  runner  and  a  chaser 
are  chosen ;  the  chaser  is  "poison,"  and  any  one  tagged  by  him  becomes 
"poison."'  The  runner  saves  himself  by  sitting  with  another  player,  who 
in  turn  saves  himself  in  the  same  manner.  If  the  chaser  tags  the  runner, 
the  chaser  at  once  "plays  safe"  by  sitting  with  another  player. 

This  is  made  an  excellent  playground  game  by  having  players  in  a  circle, 
in  couples,  partners  having  arms  hooked.  The  runner  saves  himself  by 
hooking  arms  with  another  player,  when  the  partner  of  that  player  runs 
to  hook  arms  with  another. 


76  Physical  Education 

Circle  Tag.  A  three-foot  circle  is  marked  with  chalk  on  the  floor  at  the  front 
of  the  room.  A  player  is  chosen  to  be  "it"  ;  he  stands  in  front  of  or  near 
the  circle,  so  as  to  guard  it,  and  calls  the  names  of  two  or  more  players, 
who  try  to  touch  the  circle  with  one  foot  before  being  tagged  by  "it." 
Players  may  run  in  any  direction,  and  should  make  this  a  "dare"  game. 

Simon  Says.    Players  stand  in  aisles.    Teacher  or  some  pupil  gives  gymnastic 
commands  which  are  to  be  executed  only  if  prefaced  by  "Simon  says." 
Those  Caught  must  take  their  seats.     The  row  having  most  players  standing 
after  two  minutes  of  play  is  declared  winner. 

Initial  Tag.  One  player  is  chosen ;  he  comes  to  the  front  blackboard  and 
writes  the  initials  of  some  child  in  the  room ;  the  one  whose  initials  are 
written  tries  to  tag  the  first  player  before  he  can  reach  his  seat.  The  game 
may  be  made  more  difficult  by  having  the  runner  tag  the  rear  wall  before 
going  to  his  seat. 

Target  Throw.  Draw  on  the  board  two  or  more  sets  of  three  concentric 
circles  which  form  the  targets ;  the  outer  circle  should  be  about  three  feet 
in  diameter,  the  inner  about  nine  inches.  One  player  at  a  time  takes  his 
place  on  a  line  drawn  about  twelve  feet  from  each  target ;  if  he  can  hit  the 
bull's  eye  (the  inner  circle)  with  the  bean-bag,  he  scores  5  points  for  his 
team ;  the  second  circle  scores  3,  and  the  outer,  one.  When  each  player  has 
made  a  throw,  the  scores  are  added. 

Blackboard  Relay.  The  first  player  in  each  line  is  given  a  piece  of  chalk ;  at 
the  signal  he  runs  to  the  board  and  makes  a  cross  mark  ( X ) ,  returns  to 
his  seat,  and  hands  the  chalk  to  the  player  behind  him,  who  runs  and  marks 
in  his  turn.  The  game  may  be  made  more  difficult  by  having  players  write 
their  own  initials,  their  own  names,  or  make  a  question  mark,  comma,  or 
plus  or  minus  sign.  .    . 

Last  Couple  Out.  Playground  game.  Players  in  couples,  standing  in  a  long 
line,  one  couple  behind  the  other.  An  odd  player  stands  at  the  head  of  the 
line.  He  calls  "last  couple  out,"  when  the  couple  at  the  foot  of  the  line 
run  forward,  each  on  his  own  side  of  the  line,  and  try  to  join  hands  in 
front  of  the  line  before  either  is  tagged  by  the  odd  player.  The  odd  player 
may  not  look  behind  him  as  he  calls ;  if  he  tags  one  of  the  runners,  that 
player  is  his  partner,  and  the  new  couple  take  the  head  of  the  line,  while 
the  odd  player  stands  in  front  of  them  and  gives  the  signal  for  the  couple 
now  at  the  foot  to  run  forward. 

Four  All  Round.  Players  stand  in  files  of  4,  facing  center  of  circle,  like 
spokes  of  a  wheel.  One  odd  player  is  running  on  the  outside.  He  tags 
the  last  player  of  one  file,  who  passes  the  tag  to  the  one  ahead  of  him,  and 
so  on  until  it  reaches  the  first  player  of  the  file,  who  says  "Ow,"  which  is 
the  signal  for  the  file  to  run,  in  any  direction,  around  the  outside  of  the 
circle,  until  the  original  place  of  the  file  is  reached.  The  odd  player  is 
meanwhile  running  around  the  circle  to  reach  the  position  of  the  disbanded 
file.  The  first  four  of  the  five  runners  who  re-form  the  file  are  safe ;  the 
fifth  is  "odd."  ^. 


Fifth  Grade  77 

Touch  Ball,  Players  in  circle,  facing  center.  One  player  stands  in  the 
circle,  and  tries  to  touch  a  basket  ball  which  is  rapidly  passed  around  the 
circle  in  short,  quick  throws,  not  above  the  players'  heads.  If  the  center 
player  touches  ball,  he  is  safe  and  may  take  his  place  in  the  circle ;  the 
player  who  dropped  or  held  the  ball  so  that  it  was  touched  takes  the  center 
player's  place. 

French  Blind  Man's  Buff  (also  known  as  Grunt  Pig,  Grunt).  Players  in 
circle,  right  shoulders  to  center ;   one  player  is  blindfolded  and  stands  in 

•  the  center  holding  a  blackboard  pointer  or  yard-stick.  The  circle  marches 
around  the  outside  aisles  of  the  room  until  the  blindfolded  player  raps  on 
the  floor  to  halt  the  marchers ;  the  center  player  points  with  his  stick  at 
some  player  in  the  circle,  and  tells  him  to  imitate  the  noise  made  by  some 
familiar  animal.  If  the  voice  can  be  recognized,  that  player  exchanges 
places  with  the  blindfolded  child  in  center. 

Three  Deep  (tag  game).  Players  form  a  circle,  count  off  by  twos,  and  each 
number  one  steps  behind  the  player  at  his  right.  This  quickly  gives  a 
double  circle,  players  facing  center.  Choose  one  for  a  chaser  and  another 
for  a  runner.  The  play  is  like  partner  tag.  The  runner  may  run  around 
or  between  the  players  and  may  become  safe  by  going  in  front  of  any 
group  of  two  and  remaining  there,  thus  forming  one  group  that  is  "three 
deep."  The  chaser  can  tag  the  rear  one  of  any  group  that  is  three  deep. 
The  player  who  finds  himself  at  the  rear  of  a  group  of  three  should  hasten 
to  go  in  front  of  a  group  before  the  chaser  can  tag  him.  One  who  is  tagged 
at  once  becomes  chaser,  and  should  tag  the  one  who  caught  him  if  possible. 
Discourage  long  runs  and  encourage  quick  changes  instead. 

Telegram  (relay  race).  Players  in  two  equal  teams,  lined  up  en  opposite 
sides  of  the  room  facing  the  center.  The  odd  player  (or  the  teacher  when 
there  is  no  odd  player)  stands  in  front  of  the  room  at  its  middle  with  a 
telegram  in  each  hand.  Mark  a  starting  line  for  each  team  near  the  wall 
and  equally  distant  from  the  sender.  On  signal  the  first  player  of  each 
team  runs  and  takes  the  telegram  from  the  sender,  runs  up  the  first  aisle 
of  his  half  of  the  room  and  down  the  next  one  and  then  across  to  the  next 
player  of  his  side  who  is  waiting  at  the  starting  line,  hands  him  the  tele- 
gram, and  goes  to  the  foot  of  his  line.  The  second  player  as  soon  as  he 
receives  the  telegram  runs  out,  up  and  down  the  same  aisle,  and  hands 
it  to  the  next,  and  so  on.  The  last  player  rounds  the  two  aisles  and  takes 
the  telegram  back  to  the  sender. 

Vis-a-vis.  Players  in  couples,  forming  single  circle,  all  facing  center ;  odd 
player  in  center,  who  calls  out  "Face  to  face !"  when  all  the  partners  face 
each  other ;  "back  to  back,"  when  partners  turn  backs  to  each  other ;  he 
continues  to  call  until  he  wishes  to  change  partners,  when  he  calls  "vis-a- 
vis," when  all  partners  have  to  change,  the  odd  one  in  center  now  securing 
a  partner ;  whoever  is  left  takes  the  center  when  the  game  is  repeated. 


78 


Physical  Education 


RHYTHMIC  PLAYS 

*The  Yixeyard.     {French).     In  couples,  single  circle,  all  facing  center. 

1.  (a)  Stoop  and  make  motion  of  digging,  pat  down  the  earth  (1  meas- 
ure), stand  and  stamp  lightly  3  times  (2  measures)  ;  (b)  repeat  4  times 
in  all,  turning  round  in  place  with  the  three  last  stamps  (S  measures  in 
all). 


g 


Pantomime 


THE  VINEYARD 


S 


Hni 


v  rfi 


m 


I 


•n\i  (J  f 


H 


M 

^ 


^ 


5     ¥ 


Repeat  3  times 


mmm 


%m 


Dl 


£S 


m 


m  zJ  J 


1# 


eM 


* 


S 


Pg 


ESsg! 


10 


12 


s 


nisi 


# 


fc* 


es 


s 


*■ 


:=    # 


tt# 


esI 


13 


14 


s 


« 


15 


16 


drf 


BE 


=£3 


*From    Clark's    "Physical    Training    for    the    Elementary    Schools,"    copyrighted    and 
published   by   Benj.    H.   Sanborn   &   Co.,   Boston.      By   permission. 


Fifth  Grade 


79 


2.  Join  bands,  making  one  large  circle,  all  facing  center.  8  slides  to  left ; 
S  to  right  (4  measures)  ;  join  right  hand  with  partner's,  left  hand  raised 
at  side,  and  skip  S  steps  in  small  circle,  turning  partner ;  repeat  the  8 
skips  with  left  hands  joined  (4  measures)  ;  S  measures  in  all. 

S.  (Same  music  as  step  I.)  Pick  grapes  from  branch  with  right  hand,  and 
put  them  in  basket  on  left  arm  (1  measure)  ;  stamp  three  times  (1  meas- 
ure) ;  repeat  4  times  in  all,  making  S  measures. 

4.  Boy  steps  inside  circle  and  faces  girl ;  join  both  hands,  arms  stretched 
at  sides,  and  take  8  slides  around  in  circle,  moving  clockwise ;  repeat,  re- 
turning to  place   (4  measures). 

5.  Turn  partner  as  in  step  II  (4  measures).  Face  partner,  join  right  hands, 
and  pass  partner,  giving  left  hand  to  next  dancer.  Proceed  around  circle, 
continuing  left  and  right  hands  alternately,  until  partner  is  reached  (grand 
left  and  right)   S  measures. 


"ft — I * — ' ' 


POP   GOES  THE   WEASEL 

h —  — L_. f^\- 


0 


—t- 


-=)- 


F* 


M: 


m 


hb— 5»-q-* — r 


nnni 


•-#-•- 


£Q-£3ffi 


£=fe 


T»— : — I 


:g=t»--* 


=£#= 


r-r-ri^f- ry   f-  ^~r 


• — #— • 


» — i — n-- 


r 


$=E 


=1— fr- ^-q-al- 


ili^fi 


^^^g^gi^^i^^Ei 


80  Physical  Education 

Pop  Goes  the  Weasel.     In  couples,  three  couples  to  a  set.     Players  face 
partners  across  center  of  set,  as  in  Virginia  Reel. 

1.  Head  couple,  backs  to  set,  face  outward  and  take  8  slides  to  foot ;  8  back. 

2.  Head  couple  joins  both  hands  and  takes  S  slides  down  center  of  set ; 
8  back. 

3.  Head  couple  makes  circle  of  3  with  next  girl ;  the  little  circle  of  3  takes 
S  slides  around  circle  to  right ;  4  to  left ;  then  the  new  player  is  "popped" 
under  the  arch  formed  by  the  joined  hands  of  the  original  head  couple. 
The  player  "popped"  must  be  landed  in  her  own  place. 

4.  Head  couple  repeats  No.  3  with  the  second  boy,  the  partner  of  the  player 
just  "popped"  to  place. 

5.  Head  couple  repeats  No.  3  with  foot  girl. 

6.  Head  couple  repeats  No.  3  with  foot  boy ;  then  head  couple  takes  foot  of 
set,  and  the  dance  is  repeated  with  the  new  head  couple. 

The  Merry-Go-Round  (Traditional  North  Carolina  Folic  Gam.e).  In  couples, 
all  hands  joined,  facing  center  of  circle,  odd  player  in  center.  Music  "We 
Won't  Go  Home  Till  Morning." 

1.  Eight  slides  to  left ;  8  slides  to  right. 

2.  Face  partner  and  join  both  hands ;  4  slides  to  center,  4  out. 

3.  Give    right   hand    to   partner,    and   take    "grand    right   and   left"    around 

circle  until  music  stops,  when  each  player  tries  to  retain  partner  he 
then  has,  as  odd  player  in  center  is  now  trying  to  secure  a  partner. 

The  Land  of  Cotton  {Music  "Dixie").  Partners  around  circle,  right  shoulders 
to  center,  inside  hands  joined  high ;  outer  hands  at  hip. 

1.  (a)  Beginning  with  outside  foot,  walk  three  steps  forward  and  point 
inside  foot,  bending  toward  partner.  Repeat,  beginning  inside  foot  and 
pointing   away  from  partner. 

(6)     Boy  stands  still  as  girl  turns  with  4  steps  under  raised  arms;  then 

girl  stands  as  boy  turns  under  raised  arms. 

(c)     Eight  slides  to  left,   away  from  partner;   8  slides   returning. 

2.  Repeat   (a)   and  (&),  step  1. 

(c)     Join  both  hands  and  take  8  slides  forward  around  circle;  8  slides 
returning. 

Irish  Long  Dance.     Music,  The  Irish  Washerwoman.     Hands  on  hips.     In 
couples,  sets  of  4 ;  in  lines,  facing  partner. 

1.  Touch  right  toe  forward.  Swing  right  foot  forward ;  4  soft  stamps  on  toe. 
Repeat.  Four  right  hands  joined,  8  polka  steps  around  circle.  Repeat. 
Left  feet  and  L  hands. 

2.  (a)     Head  couples  face  foot;  walk  4  steps  down  middle;  turn  and  walk 

4  steps  back  to  place. 
(6)     Head    couple    takes    4    slides    to   foot    and    return    OUTSIDE    foot 
couple,  who  takes  4  slides  to  head  and  return. 

3.  Set  joins  hands,  forming  circle  of  4.     8  slides  to  left;  4  to  right  ending 

with  head  and  foot  couples  having  changed  places.     End  with  curtsey  to 
partner. 


Fifth  Grade 


81 


THE    MERRY-GO-ROUND 


h 


34w 


1 1 — P? 


m 


(r-f 


7      '  O 


IP 


Pg 


«= 


i 


-T- 


a 


rf=± 


§ 


eg^ 


S3 


E 


^F 


■9 ty — » 


± 


H 


n 


& 


& 


m 


r-f-i 


§ 


$. t. 


5- 


f 


^ 


» i 


v-\ 


V    \      V 


y- 


±= 


rr\ 


m 


■9-1 f- 7 


SI 


Jul 


fczd 


b£ 


n  I    b 


gi 


a 


e 


EE 


4 — ^ — ^ — « ■ 

* * — A — 4- 


4 — d — a — * 


^ — «f 


s*    «<  'V 


^E: 


i— & 


# — < — * 


5 


tej 


9—  *■ 


Phys. — 6 


82 


Physical  Education 


>z& 


P 


IRISH  WASHERWOMAN 

0 — i 1 1 1 — \~\-m — i-    " 


g^j-  | 0 — 0 1 — 0 — m-\ * 


-a—-* — r— i-*— -1— -1 — -h — i — H 


A— 


-~1 


-J— •- 


-H — • 

±rz:r 


=P=^p=p: 


-q__ 


'     p      * — I 1 F-|-0 — d — d—     — h—  d— h*—  d — • —  <  — #- — m — 


-« 1 1 — A — A  —  A~— F* 1 — m 1 f^t 

m — • 1 — 0 — 0— 0 1— ...I f 


/ 


9if 


7* • 


.__P1_F— 0 


l— 


._-). 


JE^ee^ 


0     f- 


:*=0=? 


=P F—  I- 


g~t 


srf^|! 


pi=E 


■V-1- 


f-4- 


-f-     _     «      * 

-F F 1 1 — 

-I 1 1 •» 


-I F-r-l 0 0  0 0-pl 


^i|=f 


:?-»=&i: 


-F-g-0-     -F- 


F-F F-F-, F-f* 


^ 


cr 


b^^z:»=^^^^T=^E=^-0--F--=:f^=^=^-3=J=q 
—       ^ —[:— ^g^— ^— E^a^1 1 — I — I — h| — | — I — -*— ' — ' — I 0—0—0 


^ii^£zzz=^p=^g 


iz=p 


-^qzzjizzzzzzi 


HI 


GRADE  VI 

For  Explanation  of  Types  of  Exercises,  see  pages  10,  11. 

GYMNASTICS 

General  Plan  of  Gymnastic  Lesson,  page  .'ft. 
Directions  for  Teaching  Gymnastics,  pages  J/7-50. 

Lesson  I 

1.  Order,      (a)   Quick  changes  of  arm  and  foot  positions. 

(b)  Review  facings  and  march  steps. 

2.  Arm.  Head — firm;  quick  knee  bending  with  arm  flinging  sideways, 
one;  two. 

3.  Leg.     Hips — firm;   high   knee   bending   upward,    12    counts — go. 

4.  Trunk.  Shoulders  firm  and  feet  apart — jump;  bend  and  touch  right 
(L)   ankle  with  both  hands,  one;  stand  erect,  tico. 

5.  Precipitant.     March — tiptoe  march — halt. 

6.  Breathing.     Hands  on  lower  ribs — place;  broaden  chest,  one;  two. 

Lesson  II 

1.  Order.     About — face;  (carry  toe  of  right  foot  behind  and  slightly  to  left 
of  left  heel)  ;  two,  face  to  rear,  turning  to  right  on  right  heel  and  left  toe. 
(From  U.  S.  Infantry  Drill  Regulations.) 

2.  Arm.  Chest  firm  and  place  left  foot  forward,  one;  raise  heels,  two; 
lower  heels,  three;  position,  four.  Repeat  to  opposite  side;  then  to  both  sides 
in  eight  counts. 

3.  Leg.     "Knee  Dip,"  see  Lesson  IX,  Grade  V. 

4.  Trunk.  Right  hand  on  hip,  left  hand  on  head,  place;  trunk  to  right, 
oend,  (3  times  to  right,  then  reverse  arm  positions  and  repeat  3  times  to  left). 

5.  Precipitant.  Jump  in  place,  flinging  arms  sideways  on  jump,  one;  two; 
three. 

6.  Arms  sideways  fling  and  feet  apart — jump;  turn  palms  upward  and  raise 
heels,  with  deep  breathing,  one;  two. 

Lesson  III 

1.  Order.  Head  firm  and  place  left  foot  sideways — one;  raise  heels,  two; 
sink  heels,  three;  position,  four.     Repeat  to  opposite  side ;  then  in  8  counts. 

2.  Arm.  Shoulders — firm;  arms  stretching  upward  and  sideways,  4  counts 
— go. 

3.  Leg.     Chest — firm;  slow,  deep  knee  bending,  one;  tico. 

4.  Trunk.  "Prairie  dog  diving  into  his  hole"  ;  shoulders  firm  and  feet  apart 
— jump;  stretch  arms  upward — one;  bend  forward  and  touch  floor  between 
feet,  two;  stretch  upward,  three;  shoulders  firm,  four. 

5.  Precipitant.     "Bouncing  ball,"  see  Lesson  IV,  Grade  III. 

6.  West- Point  breathing;   one;   two. 

Lesson  IV 

1.  Order.     About  face  and  one  step  forward — march    (4  counts). 

2.  Arm.  Shoulders — firm;  stretch  right  arm  upward,  left  downward,  one; 
shoulders  firm,  two;  reverse  positions  of  arms. 


84 


Physical  Education 


3.  Leg.     Hands  behind  body — clasp;  slow,  deep  knee  bending,  one;  two. 

4.  Trunk.  Left  foot  forward — place;  circle  arms  overhead  and  twist  trunk 
to  left,  one;  two.    Repeat,  then  reverse  foot  positions,  and  twist  to  right. 

5.  Precipitant.  Hips — firm;  jumping  forward,  one  (bend  knees,  toes  off 
floor)  ;  jump,  advancing  about  eighteen  inches,  and  landing  with  kaees  bent, 
two;  stand  erect,  three. 

6.  "Rooster" ;  elbows  bent  at  side,  finger  tips  touching  shoulders ;  deep 
breathing,  raising  elbows,  one;  two. 

Lesson  V 

1.  Order.  Chest  firm  and  left  (R)  foot  forward — one;  heels  raise  and 
fling  arms  sideways,  two;  return,  three;  position,  four. 

2.  Arm.  Arms  sideways  fling  and  feet  apart — jump;  hand  turning  and 
deep  breathing,  one;  two. 

3.  Leg.  Shoulders — firm;  quick  knee  bending,  heels  off  floor,  with  arm 
stretching  upward,  one;  two. 

4.  Trunk.  Right  hand  on  hip,  left  arm  sideways — raise;  bend  forward 
(knees  straight)  to  touch  left  hand  to  left  toe — one;  two.  Repeat  6  counts, 
then  reverse. 

5.  Precipitant.  Hips — firm;  left  knee — raise;  step  and  hop  on  left,  then  on 
right,  2  counts  to  each  foot,  16  counts  in  all — go. 

6.  Breathing.     Finger  tips  on  front  of  diaphragm,  one;  two. 


Knee    Dip. 


Lesson  VI 

1.  Order.     March ;  tiptoe  march  ;  normal  march  ;  halt. 

2.  Arm.     "Sky    rockets" ;     quick    "shoulders    firm"    and    arm    stretching 
upward,  (  one;  two)  followed  by  slow  sinking  sideways,  downward. 

3.  Leg.     Chest — firm;  slow,  deep  knee  bending — place;  arms  sideways  fling. 
one;  two. 


Sixth  Gkade  85 

4.  Trunk.     "Prairie  dog"   (see  Lesson  III,  Grade  VI). 

5.  Precipitant.  Hips — firm;  jump  in  place'  with  half  turn  right  (L)  on 
jump :  one;  two;  three. 

6.  Breathing.     Head  firm  and  feet  apart — jump;  broaden  chest,  one;  two. 

Lesson  VII 

1.  Order.     Review  facings  and  march  steps  in  various  directions. 

2.  Arm.  "Windmill" ;  shoulders — firm;  left  arm  upward,  right  downward, 
stretch;  with  quick  flinging,  arms  change  (arms  wheel  to  reverse  position  like 
windmill  sails). 

3.  Leg.  "Power  hammer" ;  jump  to  stride  position  and  bring  fists  to  front 
of  chest — place;  quick,  strong  knee  bending,  with  downward  stroke  of  hands, 
one :  return,  two. 

4.  Trunk.  Head — firm;  left  (R)  foot  forward — place;  trunk  to  left  (R) 
bend;  raise. 

5.  Precipitant.  Raise  left  knee,  clapping  hands  under  knee — one;  replace 
foot,  two;  continue  16  counts — go.     (Keep  trunk  erect.) 

6.  Breathing.  Arms  sideways  raise  and  feet  apart — jump;  turn  palms 
upward  and  raise  heels,  one;  two. 

Lesson  VIII 

1.  Order.     Hips — firm;  knee  bending  upward,  march  time — go. 

2.  Head.  Chest — firm;  feet  apart — jump;  bend  head  backward,  deep 
breathing,  one;  two.     (Chin  in;  watch  for  hollow  backs.) 

3.  Leg.  With  palms  up,  arms  sideways  raise  and  feet  apart — jump;  arm 
raising  upward  and  heels  raising — one;  two. 

4.  Trunk.     "Steamboat,"  see  Lesson  IX,  Grade  IV. 

5.  Precipitant.  "Sprinting  Start"  ;  "on  your  mark,"  drop  to  crouch  position, 
left  (R)  knee  at  instep  of  right  (L)  foot,  fingers  supporting  weight  on  floor, 
thumbs  pointing  to  center;  at  "get  set,"  lean  forward,  straightening  rear  leg; 
at  "go,"  run  in  place  12  counts. 

6.  Shoulders — firm;  deep  breathing,  one ;  two. 

Lesson  IX 

1.  Order.  Chest  firm  and  place  left  (R)  foot  forward — one;  stretch  arms 
sideways  and  raise  heels — two;  chest  firm  and  lower  heels — three;  position, 
four. 

2.  Feet  apart — jump;  raise  arms  forward-upward — one  (keep  palms 
facing  and  as  far  apart  as  the  shoulders  are  wide)  ;  sink  sideways — down- 
ward, two.     (Turn  palms  downward  at  shoulder  height.) 

3.  Leg.  Shoulders — firm;  stretch  arms  downward  and  bend  knees,  touch- 
ing fingers  to  floor  between  feet — one;  return— two. 

4.  Trunk.  "Aeroplane";  arms  sideways  raise  and  feet  apart — jump;  touch 
right  toe  with  left  hand,  right  arm  vertical — one;  stand  erect — two;  touch  left 
toe  with  right  hand — three;  stand  erect — four.     Keep  knees  straight. 

5.  Hips — firm;  jump  in  place  with  a  half-turn  to  right  (L),  one;  two; 
three. 

6.  West  Point  breathing;  one;  two. 


86 


Physical  Education 


"Aeroplane." 

Lesson     X 

1.  Rooster  walk" ;  hips — firm;  bend  left  knee  upward,  one;  stretch  left  leg 
forward,  knee  straight,  two  ;  step  forward  on  left  and  hold,  three;  repeat  right. 

2.  Arm.     Circle  arms  overhead  and  twist  head  to  left  (R),  one;  two. 

3.  Leg.  With  palms  up,  arms  sideways  raise  and  feet  apart — jump;  arm 
raising  upward  and  knee  bending   (heels  off  floor)   one;  two. 

4.  Trunk.  Head  firm  and  left  foot  'forward — place;  trunk  to  left— bend; 
raise.  Give  three  times  on  left,  then  reverse  the  position  of  feet  and  bend  to 
right. 

5.  Precipitant.     "Sprint"   (see  Lesson  VIII,  Grade  VI). 

6.  Feet  apart — jump;  deep  breathing  with  arm  raising  forward  upward 
and  sinking  sideways,  downward   (see  Lesson  IX,  Grade  VI)   one;  two. 


GAMES  AND  CONTESTS 

Last  Man.  Players  seated  at  desks.  One  is  "it"  and  another  is  runner,  as 
in  Partner  Tag  (Grade  V).  The  runner  is  safe  if  he  stands  behind  some 
row  and  calls  "last  man,"  when  the  front  player  on  that  row  is  now  being 
chased  by  "it,"  and  saves  himself  by  standing  behind  a  row  and  calling 
"last  man."  When  the  front  player  runs,  each  player  in  that  row  moves 
forward  one  seat ;  the  runner  who  called  "last  man"  takes  the  rear  seat 
thus  vacated  in  that  row.  When  a  runner  is  tagged  he  becomes  "it,"  and 
the  one  who  tagged  him  may  now  be  tagged  in  his  turn. 


Sixth  Grade  87 

Grocery  Store.  Schoolroom  relay.  Played  like  the  Blackboard  Relay  de- 
scribed in  Grade  V,  except  that  each  player  as  he  runs  forward  must  write 
the  name  of  some  article  for  sale  in  a  grocery  store.  The  row  wins  who 
finishes  first,  and  has  uo  mistakes  in  spelling. 

Bowling.  Three  Indian  clubs  (or  erasers)  are  stood  up  in  front  of  each 
aisle ;  each  player  in  turn  stands  with  feet  behind  a  line  drawn  about  20 
feet  from  his  own  set  of  clubs,  and  tries,  by  bowling  (not  throwing)  an 
indoor  baseball,  to  knock  down  the  clubs.  One  point  is  scored  for  one  club, 
three  for  two  clubs,  and  five  if  all  three  clubs  are  knocked  down. 

Odd  axd  Even.  Players  stand  in  circle  around  the  outside  aisle  of  the  room, 
and  number  by  l's  and  2's ;  each  team  has  a  captain  who  stands  in  the 
center  of  the  circle,  holding  a  basketball  or  indoor  baseball ;  at  a  signal, 
each  captain  begins  to  pass  the  ball  to  each  member  of  his  team  in  succes- 
sion, the  ball  being  returned  by  each  player  to  the  captain ;  the  team  who 
first  completes  the  circle  is  declared  winner. 

All  Up  Relay.  Draw  two  circles.  6  inches  in  diameter,  in  front  of  each  row 
of  seats.  In  one  circle  of  each  group  place  two  Indian  clubs,  erasers,  or 
sections  cut  from  a  2x4  timber.  The  front  player  in  each  row  runs  forward, 
left  hand  behind  his  back,  and  with  his  right  hand  transfers  the  standing 
Indian  clubs  from  one  of  his  circles  to  the  other,  and  then  runs  to  his  seat, 
when  the  next  player  runs  forward,  and  transfers,  one  at  a  time,  the  Indian 
clubs  to  the  other  of  his  circles.  Any  club  failing  to  stand  erect  must  be 
replaced  by  the  player  who  last  touched  it.  This  is  also  an  excellent  play- 
ground game,  having  each  team  stand  in  single  file. 

Going  to  Jerusalem.  Players  in  single  circle  around  outside  aisle.  Mark 
off  with  chalk  three  or  four  "magic  carpet''  sections  in  the  outside  aisle, 
these  sections  about  four  feet  square.  Players  march  around  room  to 
music  of  piano  or  victrola,  and  when  music  suddenly  stops,  players  caught  in 
the  "magic  carpet"  must  take  their  seats. 

Horse  and  Rider.  Playground  relay  race.  Players  in  lines  facing  forward ; 
draw  a  goal  line  thirty  or  forty  feet  in  front  of  each  team.  The  first  player 
in  each  team  runs  forward,  touches  one  foot  across  goal,  and  runs  back 
to  his  team  to  take  the  hand  of  the  next  player  in  line  and  run  with  him 
to  the  goal ;  the  first  player  remains  there  while  the  second  returns  to 
take  the  third  player  over ;  the  team  wins  who  first  transfers  all  its  players 
across  the  field  to  the  goal. 

Stride  Ball.  Players  in  circle,  one  player  in  center ;  the  center  player  tries 
to  throw  the  basketball  between  the  feet  of  the  players  in  circle,  who  are 
standing  with  feet  wide  apart,  and  who  bat  the  ball  back  to  center  in 
guarding  their  own  feet;  if  the  center  player  succeeds  in  driving  the 
ball  outside  the  circle,  he  exchanges  places  in  the  circle  with  the  player  who 
allowed  the  ball  to  go  out. 

Newcomb.  See  rules  published  by  A.  G.  Spalding  &  Bros.,  45  Rose  Street.  New 
York. 


88  Physical  Education 

Dodge  Ball.  Players  in  two  teams,  one  forming  circle,  the  other  scattered 
within  the  circle.  The  outer  group  has  a  basketball  or  volley  ball  with 
which  they  try  to  hit  center  player,  who,  as  soon  as  he  is  hit,  must 
step  outside  the  circle.  A  good  hit  must  be  on  or  below  the  knees.  When 
all  have  been  eliminated,  the  teams  change  places  ;  the  team  which  eliminates 
the  other  in  the  shortest  time  is  declared  winner. 

Pkogbessive  Dodge  Ball.  Draw  lines  dividing  the  court  into  three  equal 
parts.  Have  players  in  three  teams,  one  occupying  each  space.  The  game 
is  played  in  three  divisions  of  five  minutes  each.  A  score  is  made  by  the 
team  hitting  a  member  of  another  team  with  the  ball ;  the  umpire  calls 
the  score  as  made.  A  good  hit  must  be  made  before  the  ball  has  touched 
the  ground.  No  player  may  step  into  an  opponent's  territory.  When  "time" 
is  called,  teams  change  places  by  rotating,  number  1  being  now  in  the  center, 
number  2  in  the  end  court,  and  so  on,  as  the  game  proceeds.  The  scores 
are  totaled  at  the  end  of  the  third  division  of  play. 

Prison  Base.  Tag  game.  Two  bases  of  considerable  size  should  be  marked 
out  and  two  prisons.  Two  teams  of  equal  numbers  occupy  the  bases.  The 
object  of  the  game  is  to  make  prisoners  of  the  opponents.  The  special  rule 
of  play  is  that  any  player  can  tag  and  thus  capture  any  player  of  the 
opposing  side  who  left  his  base  earlier ;  that  is,  the  player  who  has  been 
away  from  his  base  longest  can  be  tagged  by  any  opponent  who  has  not 
been  away  so  long.  The  only  ways  to  escape  being  tagged  are  to  run  so 
fast  that  no  opponent  can  catch  you  or  to  go  back  to  your  base.  When  one 
is  tagged,  the  tagger  can  take  his  prisoner  to  prison  without  being  captured. 
If  a  player  of  the  same  side  as  a  prisoner  can  tag  him  before  being  tagged 
by  the  opponents,  he  may  take  him  home  without  being  captured.  The 
success  of  this  game  depends  much  on  the  size  of  bases  and  prisons  and 
their  location  and  distance  apart. 

Long  Ball.  Mark  out  three  bases :  home,  pitcher's  base  and  long  base,  each 
3  by  6  feet.  The  pitcher's  base  should  be  25  to  35  feet  from  home  base 
and  long  base  several  feet  farther.  Long  base  may  be  directly  back  of 
pitcher's  base  or  in  any  other  direction  that  is  convenient.  Use  an  indoor 
baseball.  Choose  two  teams  and  have  one  team  at  bat,  the  other  in  the 
field.  The  pitcher  must  toss  the  ball  to  the  batter.  Players  bat  in  regular 
order.  Each  player  remains  at  bat  until  he  hits  the  ball,  and  then  he  runs 
to  long  base,  no  matter  where  the  hit  ball  goes.  There  are  no  foul  balls 
in  this  game.  If  a  hit  ball  is  caught  before  it  falls  to  the  ground  the  batter 
is  out.  If  the  fielders  do  not  catch  it  they  get  it  and  try  to  hit  the  batter 
with  it  before  he  can  reach  long  base,  or  while  he  is  running  home  from 
long  base.  Players  reaching  long  base  may  remain  there  until  they  see  a 
good  chance  to  return  to  home  base,  even  if  several  are  on  the  base  at  once. 
Scores  are  counted  for  each  player  reaching  home  base  safely.  The  side 
at  bat  is  out  and  must  change  places  with  opponents  when  three  batters 
are  out  or  when  all  are  on  long  base  and  no  one  is"  left  to  bat.  The  side 
making  most  scores  in  even  innings  wins. 


Sixth  Grade 


89 


RHYTHMIC  PLAYS 

s Highland   Schottische.     Couples   in  single  circle,   partners  facing.     Right 
band  on  hip,  left  over  head. 

1.  Touch   right   toe  at   right    side ;    raise   foot    behind    knee,    with    slight 
spring.     Repeat  1. 

Schottische  1  step  right  (slide  right,  step  left,  step  right,  hop  on  right, 
swinging  left  forward).     Reverse  arm  positions  during  above. 

2.  Same  as  No.  1,  using  opposite  foot  and  hand.     Repeat  1  and  2. 


HIGHLAND  SCHOTTISCHE 
Scotch 


m 


¥ 


f^m 


(3¥F^ 


<3 8 —  ^ 


w=$ 


m 


i  f  i  f 


^ 


s* 


**# 


fc);  ,      a 


MMM 1 

# 

:  J .  p"fl 

— m       it.    *    * 

<i  * 

-      £ 

e)         3 

1( 

> 

-a 
11 

9- 

o- 

« 

12 
J 

1 

-« 

a 

« 

V 

♦From    Clark's    "Physical    Training    for    the    Elementary    Schools,"    copyrighted    and 
published   by   Benj.    H.   Sanborn   &   Co.,   Boston.      By   permission. 


90  Physical  Education 

3.  Hook  right  arms,  left  overhead.  Turn  partner  with  right,  left,  right 
and  hop ;  repeat,  beginning  left  and  right ;  stamp  3  times  in  place,  re- 
versing positions  of  arms.     Repeat  with  opposite  foot  and  hand. 

Dutch  Dance.  Music,  "Where,  oh  where,  is  my  little  dog  gone,"  %  time.  The' 
step  used  is  the  typical  "wooden  shoe"  step.  Step  on  right  (count  1),  swing 
left  leg  forward,  toe  turned  up,  and  raise  and  sink  right  heel  on  counts 
2  and  3.  As  the  left  leg  is  swung  forward,  the  heel  is  brushed  on  the  floor 
on  count  2.     Repeat,  stepping  on  left  and  swinging  right  forward. 

1.  In  couples,  inside  hands  joined  high,  outside  on  skirt ;  double  circle.  8 
Dutch  steps  in  circle ;  8  measures.  Place  hands  on  hips  and  run  6  little 
steps  in  circle,  turning  outward  and  ending  facing  partner ;  2  measures. 
Curtsey  to  partner,  bending  stiffly  from  waist,  arms  out  at  sides ;  2 
measures. 

2.  Eight  Dutch  steps  around  circle,  as  in  step  1,  8  measures.  Face  partner 
and  join  both  hands,  arms  extended  stiffly  at  sides;  turn  ("windmill") 
with  8  step-hops  in  circle,  bending  to  alternate  sides,  8  measures. 

3.  Facing  partner,  inside  partner  back  to  circle,  outside  partner  facing 
center  of  circle. 

Three  Dutch  steps  forward,  passing  partner  (3  measures)  ;  curtsy  as  in 
No.  1,   1  measure. 

Three  Dutch  steps  backward,  returning  to  place;  curtsy:  4  measures. 
Join  right  hands  high  and  turn  partner  with  6  Dutch  steps,  6  measures ; 
end  with  a  little  jump,  bringing  feet  together,  on  count  1  of  7th  measure, 
jump  with  feet  apart  with  count  3  of  7th  measure ;  jump  bringing  feet 
together  and  hold  on  count  1  of  8th  measure. 

Morris  Dance — Traditional  Old  English. 

Formation   in  sets  of  8,   all  facing  forward.     Each  dancer  has  stick  2~y2 

feet  long. 
Morris  Step  (a)  Run  R,  L,  R,  hop  R  (1  measure),  (b)  same  L  (1  measure), 
(c)  step  R,  hop,  step  L,  hop  (1  measure),  (d)  bring  feet  together  and  finish 
with  jump   (1  measure). 
I.         1.     Sticks  in  R  hands.     One  Morris  step  forward  (a,  b, 

c,  d),  turning  180  degrees  on  final  jump (4  measures) 

2.  Repeat  in  new  direction (4  measures) 

3.  Repeat  1   and  2 (8  measures) 

II.     "Sticks."     Partners  facing. 

1.  Partners  strike  sticks  3  times (1  measure) 

Repeat    (1  measure).     No  step  during  this. 

2.  Holding   sticks    crossed,    repeat   parts    c    and    d    of 

Morris    step (2  measures) 

Repeat  1  and  2 (4  measures) 

III.     "Cross  over."     Partners  facing. 

1.  Cross  to  partners'  place  with  a  and  b ;  take  c  and 

d  in  place,  turning  180  degrees  on  final  jump (4  measures) 

2.  Repeat,  returning  to  place (4  measures) 


Sixth  Grade 


91 


3.     Repeat  1  and  2 (8  measures) 

Repeat  "Sticks" (4  measures)    (8  measures) 

IV.     "Back  to  Back."    Partners  facing. 

1.  Partners  meet  and  pass  around  each  other  without  turning  as  in 
Fig.  5  in  Virginia  Reel  (R  shoulders  touching)  on  parts  a  and  b  of 
Morris  step.    Return  to  own  place  on  parts  c  and  d__(4  measures) 

2.  Repeat   touching  L    shoulders (4  measures) 

3.  Repeat  1  and  2 (8  measures) 

"Sticks."     End  with  cheer,  raising  sticks  on  final  hop. 


MORRIS  DANCE 

(Old  English) 


*Pt^ 


m 


wm 


i 


M 


+ 


£ 


fS 


T       F 


s 


f — 0 


w 


*£ 


t 


^m 


i 


^Pi 


w 


m 


S 


^a 


m 


* 


m& 


w^ 


^7 


Maypole  Dance.  The  Maypole  should  be  wound  by  twelve,  sixteen,  twenty  or 
twenty-four  dancers.  Have  the  top  of  the  pole  decked  with  green  boughs 
and  flowers.  The  streamers  should  be  of  cambric,  in  different  colors,  and 
about  six  inches  or  more  in  width. 

Music,  a  march  (4/4)  of  a  festival  type.  Skipping  step  used  unless  other- 
wise stated.  Any  circle  dance  of  a  suitable  type  may  be  used  around  the 
Maypole  before  the  pole  is  to  be  wound.  The  "French  May,"  the  "Ring 
Dance,"  "Seven  Jumps"  are  effectively  used  in  this  manner. 

The  Dance.     In  couples,  inside  hands  joined,  outside  holding  skirts. 

1.  Skip   around  pole   12  skip-steps    (6  measures)  ;    curtsey   to  partner,    2 

measures. 

2.  Repeat  1,  moving  in  opposite  direction,  S  measures. 

3.  Repeat  1,  inside  partners  moving  in  original  direction,  outside  partners 


92 


Physical  Education 


4. 


in  opposite  direction,  making  2  concentric  circles ;  moving  in  opposite 
directions   (8  measures).     Reverse  and  repeat,  8  measures. 

All  join  hands,  forming  single  circle,  facing  toward  pole.  4  skip-steps 
toward  pole ;  4  back ;  join  right  hands  with  partner,  and  turn  in 
place  with  8  skip-steps,  8  measures. 

Same  as  4,  except  that  the  turn  is  made  with  left  hands  joined. 

Single  circle,  all  hands  joined,  facing  center,  eight  slides  to  left ;  8  to 
right ;  turn  partner  with  right  hands  joined ;  turn  with  left  hands 
joined,  16  measures. 

Face  partner  and  join  both  hands,  arms  stretched  out  at  sides.  Four 
slides  toward  pole;  4  slides  back  to  place  (4  measures)  ;  then  join  right 
hand  with  partner,  and  pass  partner,  giving  left  hand  to  next  dancer, 
right  hand  to  next,  and  continue  until  partner  is  reached. 

Skip  to  pole  and  pick  up  streamer ;  return  to  place ;  wind  pole  by 
passing  partner  with  right  hand,  next  dancer  with  left,  and  so  on 
as  in  No.  7.  Continue  until  pole  is  wound,  then  drop  streamers,  curtsey 
to  partner,  and  skip  off  field. 


MINUET 


^B 


■'<  f<i>! 


^m  ^  i4 


Li 


m 


w 


13 


^ 


\ 


rt\j. 


?r  I 


-4- 


^=44^^ 


Sixth  Grade 


93 


Minuet,   1812.     In  couples,  inside  hands  joined  high,    Begin  with  outside  foot. 
Curtsy  to  partner  during  introduction. 

1.  Step  forward,  pointing  inside  toe  at  heel  of  outside  foot  and  bend  both 

knees.  Step  backward  on  inside  foot,  pointing  toe  of  outside  foot. 
Three  walking  steps  forward  (begin  with  outside  foot)  and  point 
inside  toe  forward. 

2.  Repeat  1,  beginning  with  inside  foot. 

3.  Step  away  from  partner  and   bend.      Step  toward   partner   and   bend. 

Three  steps  turning,  face  back  of  room  and  point  outside  foot. 

4.  Repeat  3. 


"Stealing  Paktners,"  oe  "Skip  to  My  Lou."  This  is  a  very  old  Southern 
game-song.  There  are  a  variety  of  nonsense  verses,  of  which  the  following 
are  typical: 

"I'll  steal  a  partner,  shoo-la-loo  (or  skip  to  my  Lou)  ; 

Steal  a  partner,  shoo-la-loo ; 

Steal  a  partner,  shoo-la-loo ; 

Should  I  lose  my  darling." 

"I'll  get  another  one,  good  as  you ;"  etc. 

"If  you  can't  get  a  preacher,  a  doctor'll  do;"  etc. 

"Gone  again,  ain't  that  a  sin,"  etc. 

The  players  all  form  large  circle,   in  couples;   one  or  more  players   are 

without  partners.    As  the  song  is  sung,  usually  with  vigorous  hand-clapping, 

the  odd  players  skip  to  take  a  partner,  and  bring  her  to  the  "stealer's" 

place,  in  the  circle;  the  deserted  partner  immediately  skips  to  secure  him 

a  partner,  and  so  the  game  proceeds. 


SKIP  TO  MY  LOU 


isfefe 


V-fT 


££ 


5=1 


m 


HFf=* 


1.     Captain  Jenks 
1 


North  Carolina  Folk  Song.     Partners,  in  circle. 


I'm  Captain   Jenks  of  the   Horse   Marines, 
I  feed  my  horse  on  corn  and  beans, 

(Players  march  around  circle) 
And  swing  the  ladies  in  their  teens, 
For  that's  the  style  in  the  army, 

(Join    both   hands    and    swing   partners) 
I  teach  the  ladies  how  to  dance, 
How  to  dance,  how  to  dance, 
I  teach  the  ladies  how  to  dance, 


94  Physical  Education 

(Skip  around  circle) 
For  that's  the  style  in  the  army. 

(Curtsy  to  partner) 
3.     Salute  your  partner,  turn  to  the  right, 

(Facing  partner,  salute,  and  turn  to  right,  facing  new  partner) 
And  swing  your  neighbor  with  all  your  might, 

(Swing  new  partner) 
And  promenade  the  ladies  right, 
For  that's  the  way  in  the  army. 

(March  around  circle;  finish  with  curtsy) 


GRADE  VII 

For  Explanation  of  Types  of  Exercises,  see  pages  10,  11. 

GYMNASTICS 

General  Plan  of  Gymnastic  Lesson,  page  1/7. 
Directions  for  Teaching  Gymnastics,  pages  47-50. 

Lesson  I 

1.  Order.     Review  quick  changes  of  arm  and  foot  positions. 

2.  Arm.  In  two  counts,  arms  upward — stretch  (shoulders  firm  on  one. 
stretch  upward  on  two)  ;  continue  in  various  directions. 

3.  Leg.     "Power  Hammer,"  see  Lesson  VII,   Grade  VI. 

4.  Trunk.  Left  foot  sideways — place;  bend  and  touch  both  hands  to  right 
(L)   ankle,  one;  stand  erect,  two.     (Keep  knees  straight.) 

5.  Precipitant.  Hips — firm;  jump  in  place — one;  two;  three.  (Lesson  IX, 
Grade  V.) 

6.  Breathing,  with  hands  on  lower  ribs;  one;  two. 

Lesson  II 

1.  Order.     Review  facings  and  march  steps. 

2.  Arm.  In  two  counts,  arm  upward — stretch;  arm  parting — one  (lower 
arms  to  shoulder  level,  palms  up)  ;  raise  arms  over  head — two.  Continue  for 
six  counts;  then  in  two  counts,  arms  downward — stretch. 

3.  Leg.  Chest — firm;  arm  flinging  sideways  with  quick  knee  bending,  one; 
two. 

4.  Trunk.     "Aeroplane,"  see  Lesson  IX,  Grade  VI. 

5.  Precipitant.  Cut  step.  Hips — firm;  raise  left  leg  sideways — one;  spring 
on  to  left  foot,  swinging  right  leg  sideways — two;  continue  to  16  counts — go. 

6.  "Rooster  walk,"  see  Grade  VI,  Lesson  X. 

7.  West  Point  breathing — one;  two. 

Lesson  III 

1.  Order.     "Fire-cracker"   (see  Lesson  V,  Grade  V). 

2.  Arm.  Left  (R)  foot  forward — place;  raise  arms  sideways  and  twist 
head  to  left  (R)  with  deep  breathing;  one;  two. 

3.  Leg.  "Single  Squat."  Stand  on  one  foot,  the  other  stretched  out  in 
front;  sit  on  heel — {one)  and  rise  to  position  {two)  without  touching  ground 
with  hands  or  free  foot.      Use  arms  for  balance. 

4.  Trunk.  Hips — firm;  kneeling,  one  (kneel  on  left  knee),  two;  ^tand 
erect.  See  that  children  "kneel  tall."  Let  toe  catch  weight  before  knee  toucnes 
floor. 

5.  Precipitant.  Hips — firm;  jump  in  place,  making  quarter-turn  to  right 
(L)  ;  one;  two;  three   (see  Lesson  VI,  Grade  IV). 

6.  "Rooster"  ;  hands  on  shoulders,  elbows  at  sides ;  deep  breathing,  rais- 
ing elbows,  one;  two. 

Lesson  IV 

1.  Order.  Shoulders — firm;  left  arm  upward,  right  downward — stretch; 
reverse  in  two  counts,  "shoulders  firm"  on  one. 


96 


Physical  Education 


2.  Head — firm;  on  right  knee,  kneel;  deep  breathing  with  head  bending 
backward,  one;  two.     (Twice  on  right  knee;  twice  on  left.) 

3.  Leg.     "Knee  Dip,"  see  Lesson  IX,  Grade  V. 

4.  Trunk.  Left  foot  forward — place;  arm  flinging  forward  upward  and 
trunk  twisting  to  left,  one;  two.    Reverse  position  of  feet  for  twisting  to  right. 

5.  Abdominal.  Raise  left  knee,  clapping  hands  under  knee — one;  replace 
foot,  two.    Continue  to  12  counts.    Keep  trunk  erect. 

6.  Cut  step.  Hips — firm;  left  leg  sideways — raise;  cut  step,  16  counts—  go. 
(See  Lesson  II,  Grade  VII.) 

7.  Arm  raising  sideways  and  heel  raising  with  deep  breathing — one;  two. 

Lesson  V 

1.  Order.    Facings  and  march-steps  in  various  directions. 

2.  Arm-leg.  In  two  counts,  arms  upward — stretch;  arm  parting  with  knee 
bending — one;  two.     (See  Lesson  II,  Grade  VII.) 

3.  "Signalling."  Raise  left  arm  and  right  leg  sideways — one;  replace — two. 
Reverse. 

4.  Trunk.  Hips — firm;  lunge  forward  (placing  left  foot  3  foot-lengths 
ahead,  left  knee  bent,  backward  knee  straight)  ,one;  replace,  pushing  with 
forward  foot,  two. 

5.  Precipitant.  Hips — firm;  jump  in  place,  making  half-turn  left  (R)  — 
one;  two;  three. 

6.  Head — firm;  broaden   chest  with  deep   breathing — one;   two. 


Forward — Lunge. 


Seventh  Gkade  97 

Lesson     VI 

1.  Order.  Head  firm  and  left  (R)  foot  forward — place;  knee  bending,  heels 
off  floor — two;  knees  stretch — three;  position — four.  Repeat  to  other  side. 
Hold  each  position  until  correctly  done. 

2.  On  left  (R)  knee — kneel;  circle  arms  over  head  and  twist  trunk  to  left, 
one;  two.  Repeat,  then  stand  erect,  and  repeat,  kneeling  on  opposite  side, 
bending  right. 

3.  Arm.  Stretch  arms  sideways,  upward,  backward  and  downward,  8 
counts — go.     ("Shoulders  firm"  on  count  one.) 

4.  Leg.  Chest — firm;  slowly,  knees  deep — bend;  arms  sideways  fling — one; 
two   (repeat  four  times)  ;  knees — stretch;  po — sit  ion. 

5.  Precipitant.  Hips — firm;  with  a  light  spring  cross  left  foot  in  front 
of  right — one;  reverse  position  of  feet — two;  continue  for  12  counts — go. 

6.  "Rooster,"  see  Lesson  IV,  Grade  VI. 

Lesson  VII 

1.  Order.  Circle  arms  overhead  and  place  left  (R)  foot  forward — one; 
heels  raise — tivo;  heels  sink — three;  position — four.  Continue  through  16 
counts. 

2.  Arm.  In  two  counts,  left  arm  upward,  right  downward — stretch;  wind- 
mill fling  to  reverse  position — two.     (See  Lesson  VII,  Grade  VI.) 

3.  Hands  clasped  back  of  body — place;  deep  knee  bending  to  touch  floor — 
one;  two.     Avoid  tipping  body  backward. 

4.  Trunk.  Chest — firm;  lunge  forward  left  (R) — one;  two  (see  Lesson  V., 
Grade  VII). 

5.  Precipitant.     "Sprint,"  see  Lesson  VIII,  Grade  VI. 

6.  Arm  sideways  fling  and  feet  apart — jump;  deep  breathing  with  hand 
turning  and  heel  raising — one;  two. 

Lesson     VIII 

1.  Order.     Quick  change  of  arm  and  foot  positions. 

2.  Arm.  Shoulders — firm;  stretch  right  arm  sideways  and  left  downward 
■ — one;  two;  reverse  the  arm  positions. 

3.  Leg.     "Piston  rod,"   see  Lesson  I,  Grade  IV. 

4.  Trunk.  Feet  apart — jump;  fling  arms  forward-upward  and  twist 
trunk  to  left  (R)- — one;  lower  arms  and  twist  forward,  two.  Repeat  to  oppo- 
site side. 

5.  Precipitant.  Hips — firm;  double  jump  in  place,  making  two  quarter- 
turns  to  right  or  left ;  one,  bend  knees,  heels  off  floor ;  two,  jump  facing  to 
right  (L)  ;  three,  make  a  second  jump  in  opposite  direction ;  four,  stand  erect. 

6.  Hands  on  lower  ribs — place;  deep  breathing — one;  two. 

Lesson  IX 

1.  Order.  Arm  flinging  forward,  upward  and  quick  knee  bending — one; 
two. 

2.  Head.  Chest  firm  and  feet  apart — jump;  head  bending  backward  with 
deep  breathing — one;  two.  (See  that  chin  is  kept  close  in.  and  that  waist  is 
flat.) 

Phys. — 7 


98  Physical  Education 

3.  Leg.     "Power  Hammer,"  see  Lesson  VII,  Grade  VI. 

4.  Trunk.     Right  band  on  hip,  left  on  head — place;  trunk  to  right — bend; 
raise,  repeat,  then  reverse  position  of  hands  for  bending  to  left. 

5.  Precipitant.     Hips — firm;   left   foot    crossed    in   front    of   right — place; 
spring,  reversing  position  of  feet,  16  counts — go. 

6.  Head  firm  and  feet  apart — jump;  deep  breathing — one;  two. 

Lesson     X 

1.  Order.     "Fire-cracker,"  see  Lesson  V,  Grade  V. 

2.  Arm.     Shoulders — firm;    right    arm    sideways,    left    upward — stretch; 
change  in  two  counts — one;  two. 

3.  Leg.     Hips — firm;    left    foot    forward — lunge;    to    head    firm — change; 
again,  change;  foot  replace.    Repeat,  right  foot  forward. 

4.  Trunk.     "Aeroplane,"  see  Lesson  IX,  Grade  VI. 

5.  Hips — firm;   double  jump   in  place,   making  two  half-turns,   right   and 
left;  one;  two;  three;  four.     See  Lesson  VIII,  Grade  VII. 

6.  West  Point  breathing — one;   two. 

GAMES  AND  CONTESTS 

Geography  Relay.  Played  like  "Blackboard  Relay,"  Gr.  V.,  except  that 
players  write  on  the  board  the  names  of  some  state  of  the  Union,  or  of 
some  river  of  Europe,  or  some  city  of  their  own  state.  The  row  wins  who 
first  finishes  without  errors  in  spelling,  capitals  or  subject-matter.  No 
duplicate  names  allowed  in  a  given  row. 

History  Relay.  As  above,  writing  the  name  of  some  historical  personage  in 
a  given  country  or  period,  as  the  Presidents    of  the  United  States. 

A  Dozen  Ways  of  Getting  There.  Relay  race  for  schoolroom  or  playground. 
The  first  player  in  the  line  runs  to  touch  the  wall  or  a  goal  line,  and  when 
she  has  returned  to  her  place  the  second  must  advance  in  a  manner  differ- 
ent from  her  predecessor ;  hopping,  skipping,  tiptoe  running,  going  sideways, 
backwards,  flying,  galloping — any  method  of  procedure  not  already  given 
in  your  own  row. 

Schoolroom  Basketball.  Two  or  more  waste  baskets  are  placed  on  the 
floor,  and  a  throwing  line  drawn  fifteen  feet  from  each  basket.  One  team 
is  lined  up  behind  each  throwing  line,  facing  basket.  The  ball  is  given  to 
the  rear  player  in  each  line,  and,  on  the  signal,  is  passed  forward  with 
both  hands  over  the  heads  of  the  line  until  it  reaches  the  front  player,  who 
throws  for  the  basket,  and,  whether  or  not  a  goai  is  made,  picks  up  the 
ball  and  runs  to  the  back  line  to  start  the  ball  again  forward.  The 
side  making  most  scores  is  the  winner. 

Nose  and  Toe  Tag.  Players  scattered  about  the  playing  space ;  one  is  "it," 
and  tries  to  tag  another  player,  who  will  then  become  "it"  in  the  first 
player's  place.  Players  save  themselves  from  being  tagged  by  grasping 
nose  with  one  hand  and  toe  with  the  other  hand,  standing  on  one  foot. 

Volley  Ball.  See  rules  published  by  A.  G.  Spalding  &  Bros,  45  Rose  St., 
New  York. 


Seventh  Gkade  99 

End  Ball.  Use  the  basketball  court.  Draw  a  line  across  the  center  and 
another  about  four  feet  from  each  end  line.  Players  in  two  teams  of  equal 
numbers,  each  with  a  captain.  The  captain  of  each  team  chooses  one-third 
of  his  players  as  "catchers,"  and  places  them  in  the  small  space  next  to 
the  end  of  the  court  and  back  of  the  opposing  "guards."  Two-thirds  of  the 
players  are  "guards"  or  "throwers."  For  example,  beginning  at  the  south 
end  of  the  court  we  will  place  the  catchers  of  team  A ;  between  them  and 
the  center  line  will  be  placed  the  throwers  of  team  B  ;  then  across  the  center 
line  the  throwers  of  team  A;  and  finally  at  the  north  end  the  catchers  of 
team  B.  Scores  are  made  by  having  the  throwers  or  guards,  as  they  are 
called  interchangeably,  throw  the  ball  over  the  heads  of  the  opposing  guards 
so  that  it  can  be  caught  by  your  own  catchers.  The  umpire  calls  a  score 
for  each  successful  catch  made  in  this  way.  If  the  catchers  get  the  ball, 
whether  they  catch  it  or  not,  they  throw  it  back  to  their  own  guards  so  that 
another  try  can  be  made.  No  score  is  counted  on  the  return,  even  if  the 
guards  catch  it.  As  long  as  a  side  can  throw  accurately  enough  to  keep  the 
ball  from  the  opposing  team  they  can  continue  these  trials  for  a  score. 
Whenever  any  opponent  gets  the  ball  it  is  handled  by  that  side  in  the  same 
manner.  Stepping  over  the  line  is  a  foul,  and  this  forfeits  the  I  all  if 
made  by  the  side  having  it,  or  gives  a  score  if  made  by  the  side  which  has 
not  the  ball.  It  is  also  a  foul  to  advance  with  ball.  Teams  change  sides 
after  half  the  time  has  been  played. 

Soccer  Dodge  Ball.  Lay  out  a  circle  25  or  30  feet  in  diameter  and  arrange 
the  two  teams  as  in  Dodge  Ball,  one  team  forming  the  circle,  the  other 
inside.  One  player  on  the  outside  of  the  circle  puts  the  ball  in  play  by 
kicking  it  in  on  the  signal.  The  outside  team  keeps  the  ball  in  play  by 
passing  it  with  the  feet  or  head,  or  kicking  it  as  in  soccer,  attempting  to 
eliminate  the  players  on  the  inside  of  the  circle  by  hitting  them  with  the 
ball.  No  player  of  the  outside  circle  is  permitted  to  touch  the  ball  with 
his  hands;  penalty  for  this  is  his  elimination  from  the  game.  Should  any 
player  of  the  inside  team  step  outside  the  circle  he  is  out  of  the  game. 
The  team  eliminating  the  greater  number  of  players  in  a  given  lime  is  the 
winner.  Players  on  the  outer  circle  should  keep  their  places:  players  on 
the  inside  team  scatter  within  the  circle  to  best  avoid  the  ball.  If  the  ball 
stops  within  the  circle,  the  nearest  player  goes  in  and  dribbles  the  ball  out. 

Kick  Pin.     Played  on  regulation  baseball  diamond  on  the  playground.     Can 
be  modified  for  the  gymnasium. 
Equipment — 1  Soccer  ball  and  4  Indian  clubs. 

Place  an  Indian  club  on  each  base  and  one  on  home  plate.  Scatter  players 
around  on  the  diamond  and  around  the  bases.  Pitcher  bowls  the  soccer 
ball  toward  home  plate  to  bowl  over  the  batter's  pin  which  is  on  home 
plate.  The  batter  tries  to  kick  the  ball  to  prevent  it  from  howling  over  his 
pin.  Should  the  batter  miss  the  ball  with  his  foot  and  the  ball  knocks  over 
the  pin  the  batter  is  out.  Should  the  batter  kick  the  ball  he  must  run 
around  all  the  bases  and  try  to  make  a  home  run  ;  he  cannot  stop  at  any 
base  but  must  keep  on  running.  The  player  who  fields  the  ball  cannot  run 
with  the  ball  but  must  try  and  knock  down  the  pin  with  the  ball  on  the 
base  ahead  of  the  runner  thus  putting  the  runner  out.  viz. :     If  the  runner 


100  Physical  Education 

has  just  passed  second  base  and  is  headed  for  third  the  pin  on  third  base 
must  be  knocked  down  with  the  ball  to  put  him  out.  Should  the  player  who 
fielded  the  ball  run  with  it  the  runner  is  entitled  to  score.  The  player  must 
throw  or  pass  the  ball  from  where  it  is  fielded.  Three  men  out  constitute 
an  inning.     (From  Herbert  E.  Cager,  Springfield,  Mass.) 

Potato  Race.  (Individual  Contest).  Mark  a  starting  line  near  one  side  of 
an  open  playing  space ;  six  feet  from  it  make  a  circle  18  inches  in  diameter, 
and  at  intervals  of  3  feet  from  the  circle  and  beyond  it  mark  from  6  to  10 
crosses,  depending  on  the  size  of  the  room.  In  the  circle  place  as  many 
bean  bags,  potatoes,  erasers  or  blocks  of  wood  as  you  have  crosses.  This 
is  the  outfit  for  one  runner ;  provide  as  many  as  room  and  time  allow. 
The  players  can  do  this  quickly  by  organizing  the  work.  At  the  signal 
each  player  who  is  to  run  starts  forward  from  the  starting  line,  takes  a 
bag  from  the  circle  and  places  it  on  a  cross,  returns  and  gets  another  and 
places  it  likewise,  and  continues  until  all  are  placed ;  then  he  returns  to 
the  starting  line.  The  first  to  cross  the  starting  line  after  doing  his  work 
is  winner.  It  is  a  foul  to  fail  to  leave  a  bag  on  a  cross.  The  next  set  of 
runners  can  start  with  the  bags  on  the  crosses  and  bring  them  one  by  one 
to  the  circle. 

This  can  be  made  a  group  contest  by  having  teams  and  counting  the 
scores  in  the  different  races.  It  can  also  be  done  in  the  aisles  of  the  school- 
room. 

RHYTHMIC  PLAYS 

Sailors'  Hornpipe.     Traditional  Old  English.    Couples  in  line,  facing  forward. 

1.  Arms  folded  high ;  8  polka  steps  forward,  high  on  toes ;  keep  steps  small, 

8  measures. 

2.  Side    hop    to    right,    hitching    trousers ;    repeat    to    left,    right,    left,    4 

measures ;  move  backward  with  small  steps  on  heels,  winding  rope,  4 
measures.     Repeat  all  of  No.  2. 

3.  Slide  to  right,  right  hand  over  eyes,  left  behind  waist;  same  left,  right, 

left,  4  measures;  move  backward  (pulling  up  anchor)  stepping  back 
on  right,  leaning  backward  and  pulling  arms  from  front  to  chest; 
step  on  left,  bending  forward  to  pull  up  anchor ;  repeat  4  times  in  all, 
4  measures.     Repeat  all  of  No.  3. 

4.  Polka  to  right,  swinging  arms  sideways  to  right ;  touch  left  toe  at  left, 

snapping  fingers ;  touch  left  heel  at  left,  snapping ;  2  measures.  Con- 
tinue 4 ;  8  measures  in  all. 

5.  Swinging  right  foot  across  in  front  of  left,  and  take  1  polka  step  to  left 

side,  beginning  right  foot,  and  holding  clasped  hands  low  in  front ; 
same,  swinging  left  foot  across  in  front  of  right;  continue  through 
8  measures. 


Seventh  Grade 


101 


SAILOR'S   HORNPIPE 


(^ — I— p-» ->—*■- — p-^— r*-| — *— j — *— [ — i — ?\m~m~m  --<--*— j—*— j- 


.«.        ^. 


^|^=l==^=^--r?===?zz=iiz=^==:p?zz=:?===:gz=:: 


:l f ? •: ;%: 4 t- 


4       %       -«- 


*= 


— I f— I br~r~~| — \—[\ 1 1 if~  -I     [      •— i Hjj — ' — F— j 


Pg 


t= 


. -£2- 

*— P --P sr-fH— 

-I g g =1- 

• » 


-• » 1 


4— p— •-f~-  F±-fc 


N# 


£: 


-^ ^ — Ps>- 


-r     -#- 


£=!= 


-m •- 


f- 


-m •- 


*-j— i-^-^-a-^-a-F*— i— I — '-• — • — F»-r-5-i-3 — i 


i^^r 


£B 


1 


5££= 


t=: 


-P — I — P=— 


f   *    f 

-F— *— EE 


S^ll 


rr 


102  Physical  Education 

Virginia  Reel  (Music,  "Money  Musk,"  "Arkansas  Traveler"  or  any  old- 
fashioned  lively  tunes).  Pupils  in  two  lines,  several  feet  apart.  If  there 
are  more  than  twelve,  have  two  or  more  sets.  One  end  of  set  is  called  the 
head,  the  other  the  foot. 

Head 

1         2 

1         2 

1         2 

1         2 

1         2 

1         2 
Foot 

Fig.  1.  Head  No.  1  and  foot  No.  2  go  toward  each  other,  bow,  and  back  to 
places,  then  head  No.  2  and  foot  No.  1.  Note :  In  figures  2,  3,  4  and  5, 
the  head  and  foot  couples  work  diagonally  as  described  in  figure  1. 

Fig.  2.  Head  No.  1  and  foot  No.  2  join  right  hands,  turn  and  return  to 
places.    Opposite  ends  same. 

Fig.  3.     Join  left  hands,  turn  and  return  to  places. 

Fig.  4.     Turn  with  both  hands  joined. 

Fig.  5.    Back  around  each  other,  "do-si-do." 

Fig.  6.  "Cast  off."  Head  couple  join  right  hands  and  turn  half  way 
around,  No.  1  joining  left  hand  with  the  second  No.  2  and  No.  2  with  the 
second  No.  1.  Continue  down  the  set,  head  couple  swinging  with  the  r'ght 
hand  after  each  time  of  swinging  one  in  the  line.  When  foot  of  set  is 
reached,  head  couple  join  both  hands  and  skip  sidewise  to  head  of  set. 

Fig.  7.  Countermarch.  Each  line  marches  with  No.  1  and  No.  2  of  head 
couple  leading,  outside  of  set  and  down  to  foot,  where  head  couple  form  an 
arch  with  both  hands  and  all  others  pass  under.  This  brings  the  second 
couple  at  head  and  leaves  head  couple  at  foot.  Continue  if  desired  until 
all  couples  have  been  head  couples. 

Old  Dan  Tucker,  Traditional  North  Carolina  Folk  Dance.  All  join  bands  in 
a  circle  and  standing  next  to  partners. 

1.  Eight  glides  left. 

2.  Eight  glides  right. 

3.  Four  steps  to  center,  four  back. 

4.  Swing  partner.     Repeat. 

Gentleman  or  partner  on  the  left  swing  on  to  the  next  lady  to  his  right  and 

the  dance  continues. 
Figure  2 : 

1.  With  partners  face  left  and  march  16  steps  around  your  circle. 

2.  Face  center  and  march  four  steps  forward  and  back. 

3.  Swing  partner  eight  steps. 
Figure  3 : 

1.  Face  partners— give  right  hand  to  partner,  left  hand  to  the  next  one 

and  continue  around  the  circle  until  you  are  back  in  your  own  place. 

2.  Swing  partners  until  the  end  of  the  rhythm. 


Seventh  Grade 
OLD  DAN  TUCKER 


103 


h$uu*  j'i 


m 


Zj      Af-  J     J     a 


m 


£ 


t 


FF# 


ESS 


fe 


f^  ■'IMjUJ-  J  J  ijj  j  t  J 


P 


y. 


^ 


£; 


r '  i   '  t 


&e£ 


&£ 


m 


i  j  ^ 


:.'■'! ?,' fur  riff^ 


Square  Dance    {Traditional  American). 

Formation — 4,  5,  6,  8,  etc.,  couples  form  a  square. 

1.  Curtsy.     Side  couples  to  center — bow. 
End  couples  the  same. 

Side  couples  cross  over. 
End  couples  cross  over. 

2.  Balance  all.     Boys  go  to  center,  come  to  partner  and  turn  partner. 

3.  Rabbit  over  the  log.     Head  couple  to  left  couple : 

1.  Join  right  hands  in  center  and  go  to  left. 

2.  Join  left  hands  and  go  to  right. 

3.  Turn  your  opposite  partner. 

4.  Turn  your  own  partner. 

5.  Head  couple  on  to  next  couple. 

4.  Balance  all.     Repeat  No.  2. 


104  Physical  Education 

5.  Blue  Bird  in,  Red  Bird  out. 

1.  Head  couple  goes  to  couple  to  their  left. 

2.  Lady  from  couple  1  is  Blue  Bird  and  the  3  form  a  circle  around 

her. 

3.  Then  Red  Bird  takes  Blue  Bird's  plac*e  and  a  circle  is  formed 

around  her.     Then  on  to  the  next  couple. 

6.  Basket. 

1.  Boys  to  center — form  a  circle. 

2.  Girls  form  a  circle  around  boys. 

3.  Boys'  circle  goes  to  left. 

4.  Girls  to  right — change  directions. 

5.  When  back  to  partner,  boys  raise  arms  and  girls  come  under. 

6.  All  go  around  circle. 

7.  Balance  all. 

8.  Chase  the  Black  Snake. 

1.  Head  couple  to  couple  2. 

2.  Head  couple  goes  around  girl  of  couple  2. 

3.  Head  couple  swings  out  into  space  in  circle. 

4.  Couple  No.  2  joins  couple  1  in  single  file  and  pass  to  couple  3  and 

repeat. 

9.  Grand  Right  and  Left. 

1.  Right  hand  to  your  partner. 

2.  Left  hand  to  your  neighbor. 

3.  Meet  your  partner  and  "Railroad."      (That  is,  go  back  in  same 

direction,  repeating  1  and  2  to  your  own  place.) 

10.  Cheat  or  Swing. 

First  couple  out,  lady  in  center,  1st  gentleman  pushes  out  gentle- 
man of  any  couple,  and  turns  that  lady,  while  her  partner  circles 
around  center  lady,  who  refuses  or  accepts  to  balance  with  him. 

11.  Ladies  form  circle  in  center,  gentlemen  outside.     Circles  slide  in  op- 

posite directions  until  "Break  and   Swing." 

12.  Turn  your  partners  and  promenade  off  stage. 


RELIEF  DRILLS  FOR  GRADES  III  TO  VII 


Teachers  are  finding  that  these  open-window  intermissions  add  to  the 
children's  power  of  attention  and  subtract  problems  of  discipline.  The  essen- 
tial factor  in  this  brief  but  important  section  of  our  physical  education  plan 
is  brisk  movement  accompanied  by  mental  relaxation.  A  lively  game  is  ideal 
for  this  purpose,  or  some  of  the  informal  imitative  activities  given  in  the 
daily  program  may  be  repeated  here.  The  following  activities,  elsewhere  de- 
scribed in  detail,  will  be  found  suitable  for  this  purpose. 


Grades  III,  IV,  V 
Marching 
Marking  time 
Running  in  place 
Chopping   trees 
Bouncing  Ball 
Crossing  Creek 
Jumping  Fence 
Climbing  Ladder 
Quick   arm  stretchings 
Quick  knee  bendings 
Spring  jump,  feet  apart  and  together 
Hopping,  2  counts  on  each  foot 
Crow  Hop 
Rabbit  Hop 
Fire  Engine 
Automobile  Race 
Ducks  Fly 
Going  to  Jerusalem 
Bird  Catcher 
Hopping   Relay 
Stealing  Steps 
Partner  Tag 
Hoisting  Sail 
Signal  Station 

French  Blind  Man's  Buff  (Grunt  Pig) 
Pretty  Girl  Station 
Follow  the  Leader 


Grades  VI,  VII 
Marching 
Running 

Running  in  place 
Steamboat 
Piston  Rod 
Fire   Cracker 
Aeroplane 
Jump  in  place 

Spring  jump,  feet  apart  and  together 
Spring  jump,  feet  forward  and  back 
Spring  jump,  feet  crossed 
Simon  Says 
Bending  to  touch  toes 
Wicket   Walk 
Knee  Dip 
Call  Ball 

Quick  arm  stretchings 
Quick  knee  bendings 
Knee  upward  bending 
Last  Man 
Partner  Tag 
Going  to  Jerusalem 
Blackboard    relays 
A  Dozen  Ways  of  Getting  There 


ATHLETIC  CONTESTS 

The  average  boy  and  girl  of  the  fifth,  sixth  and  seventh  grade  is  either 
in  the  pre-adolescent  or  the  early  adolescent  stage.  These  are  periods  of 
rapid  bodily  growth,  with  tendency  to  heart  weakness  and  fatigue ;  the  heart 
has  not  yet  caught  up  with  the  body-growth,  and  while  the  child's  nature 
demands  activity,  he  is  not  yet  ready  for  sports  that  necessitate  endurance. 
Long  distance  runs  and  over-played  basketball  are  types  of  activities  that 
may  strain  and  permanently  damage  the  heart.  Every  physician  and  physical 
director  can  give  tragic  instances  of  hearts  strained  at  this  age,  never  to 
recover  their  functioning  power.  Sprints,  short  dashes,  relay  races,  games 
of  skill — these  may  safely  be  given  in  the  elementary  schools;  quarter-mile 
races,  football  and  basketball  are  unsafe  and  are  opposed  for  pre-high  school 
children  by  the  great  majority  of  medical  and  educational  authorities. 

The  most  universal  and  most  wholesome  forms  of  outdoor  sports  are  the 
primitive  activities  of  tramping,  camping,  swimming ;  the  Camp  Fire  Girls 
and  the  Boy  Scouts  have  done  a  tremendous  service  to  American  youth  by 
popularizing  "getting  back  to  Nature." 

A  partial  list  of  the  standard  athletic  contests  for  this  age  is  given  below : 

For  Boys 

1.  Athletic  Badge  Tests.  The  Playground  and  Recreation  Association  of 
America,  315  Fourth  Avenue,  New  York,  has  adopted  certain  standards  which 
every   boy  ought  to   attain.     These  tests   may  be  given   by   any   responsible 


"On    Your    Mark." 


Athletic  Contests  107 

school  authority,  and  boys  successfully  passing  them  may  wear  the  standard 
bronze  button  which  may  be  secured  from  tbe  Association.  The  tests  consist 
of  chinning,  standing  broad  jump,  60-yard  dash,  and  the  running  high  jump. 
Write  the  Association  Headquarters  for  full  particulars. 

2.  Field  and  Track  Events.  Standing  broad  jump ;  running  broad  jump ; 
running  high  jump ;  dashes  up  to  100  yards ;  shot  put ;  relay  races. 

3.  Team  Games.  Newcomb,  Volley  Ball,  Soccer  Foot  Ball,  rules  published 
by  A.  G.  Spalding  &  Bro.,  45  Rose  St.,  New  York  ;  Baseball ;  Tennis  ;  Swimming. 

For  Girls 

1.  Athletic  Badge  Tests.  Girls  passing  these  tests  are  entitled  to  the 
Playground  and  Recreation  Association  pin ;  write  for  particulars  as  directed 
above.  The  tests  for  girls  include  relay  races,  potato  race,  basketball  goal- 
throwing,  throwing  for  distance,  and  volley-ball  serving. 

2.  Field  and  Track  Events.  These  may  include  baseball  distance  throw, 
baseball  target  throw,  basketball  distance  throw,  hop-step-and-jump,  potato 
race,  40-  to  50-yard  dash,  and  relay  races. 

3.  Team  Games.  Baseball,  using  playground  ball ;  Bat  Ball ;  Dodge  Ball ; 
progressive  dodge  ball  (see  games  for  Gr.  VI),  tennis,  swimming,  volley  ball 
(Spalding  rules)  and  Newcomb   (Spalding  rules). 

Rural  School  Playgrounds.  No  attempt  has  been  made  to  indicate  the 
■planning  or  equipment  for  rural  school  grounds,  as  this  has  already  been 
done  by  Dr.  H.  D.  Meyer  in  "The  Rural  Playground,"  published  by  the  Uni- 
versity of  North  Carolina,  and  issued  free  of  charge. 

I.    BAT   BALL 

Number  of  players :  An  official  team  consists  of  ten  players.  Any  number 
may  play. 

Apparatus :     One  basketball ;  one  post,  5  to  8  feet  high. 
Position  of  players  on  field : 


X 

X 

P   (post) 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

No.  Line 

.* 

Bas 

;e                         Line 

1 

2,  3, 

4,  5,  6,   7,  S,  9,   10 

108  Physical  Education 

Object  of  game.  To  bat  the  ball  with  the  open  palm  across  the  No.  line, 
run  down  the  field,  circle  the  post  at  farther  end  and  get  back  over  the  No. 
line  without  being  hit  with  the  ball.  This  constitutes  a  "run"  and  scores  one 
point  for  the  team  making  the  run. 

To  Start  the  Game.  The  captain  toes  the  base-line,  bats  the  ball  across 
the  No.  line,  runs  around  the  post  at  farther  end  of  the  field  and  back  across 
the  No.  line.  He  then  takes  his  place  at  the  head  of  his  team.  The  players 
bat  in  rotation ;  each  player  moving  up  to  the  base-line  as  soon  as  the  one 
ahead  of  him  starts  to  run.  After  the  last  player  on  the  team  has  played, 
sides  are  changed ;  the  team  at  the  bat  going  into  the  field ;  that  in  the  field 
coming  to  bat.  An  inning  is  finished  when  each  player  has  served  in  turn. 
A  game  consists  of  three  innings. 

"Outs."     A  player  is  Put : 

1.  If  hit  by  the  ball  while  running. 

2.  If  he  does  not  bat  the  ball  across  the  No.  line. 

3.  If  the  ball  is  caught  "on  the  fly"  by  a  player  in  the  field. 
"Fouls." 

1.  Running  with  ball. 

2.  Holding  ball  longer  than  three  seconds. 

3.  Batting  ball  with  fist,   or   anything  but  the   open  palm. 
Fouls  count  one  point  against  the  side  making  foul. 
"Suggestions." 

1.  Players  must  be  prompt  at  the  base-line  when  it  is  their  turn  to  bat. 

2.  Run  immediately  after  batting  the  ball.  If  you  are  out  you  will  be 
called  back. 

3.  Do  not  always  follow  the  same  course  in  running.  "Keep  your  opponents 
guessing." 

4.  Hit  the  ball  in  one  direction  and  run  in  another. 

5.  The  ball  must  not  be  held  by  players  in  the  field.  It  should  be  passed 
from  one  to  another  on  the  team  until  there  is  good  opportunity  to  hit  the 
runner.     Work  up  "team  play." 

6.  Do  not  throw  the  ball  aimlessly.     Always  throw  to  some  one. 

II.    VOLLEY  BALL 

Rule  book  published  by  A.  G.  Spalding  &  Bro.,  45  Rose  St.,  New  York. 
Number  of  Players :     7  to  14  on  a  team,  depending  on  space. 
Apparatus :     Net  2  feet  wide,  stretched  from  side  to  side,  7  feet  from  ground 
(if  net  is  not  available,  use  rope),  volley  ball. 

Court:  50  feet  long,  25  feet  wide.  (If  space  is  not  large  enough  use  largest 
court  available.) 

Game :     The  game  consists  in  keeping  the  ball  in  motion  back  and  forth 
across  a  high  net  by  striking  it  with  the  open  palm.     The  ball  must  not  be 
allowed  to  touch  the  floor  or  go  outside  the  court. 
Start :     By  serving. 

1.     Rules  for  Servmg.    1.     Server  stands  with  one  foot  on  rear  boundary  of 
court  and  the  other  behind  it. 

2.     The  ball  is  tossed  up  with  one  hand  and  batted  with  the  open 
palm  of  the  other. 


Athletic  Contests  109 

3.  Two  trials  are  allowed  to  send  the  ball  into  the  opponent's  court. 

4.  Any  two  players  on  the  server's  team  may  assist  the  ball  over 

the    net   neither   player    striking   the   ball    more    than    twice    in 
succession. 

2.  A  Server  is  Out:    1.     When  an  assisted  ball  fails  to  land  in  the  oppon- 

ent's court,  even  if  it  is  the  server's  first  trial. 

2.  When  he  fails  to  place  the  ball  in  the  opponent's  court  after  two 

trials. 

3.  When  his  side  knocks  the  ball  out  of  bounds,  or  under  the  net. 

4.  When  his  side  allows  the  ball  to  touch  the  ground. 

5.  When  his  side  fails  to  return  ball  to  opponents. 

6.  When  a  served  ball  hits  a  player  on  the  server's  side  and  does 

not  bounce  into  the  opponent's  court. 

7.  When  served  ball  falls  outside  opponent's  court. 

8.  If  ball  hits  or  goes  under  the  net  during  service,  it  is  a  dead  ball 

and  loses  the  server  one  trial.  Players  on  a  side  may  serve  in 
rotation,  or  one  person  may  be  chosen  as  server. 

3.  Fouls:     1.    A  player  batting  the  ball  more  than  twice  in  succession. 

2.  A  player  touching  the  net:    (a)    If  the  player  is  on  the  serving 

side,  his  side  loses  the  ball  and  the  opponents  serve,  but  do  not 
score,  (b)  If  the  player  is  on  the  receiving  side,  the  serving  side 
scores  one  point,  (c)  If  the  net  is  touched  simultaneously  by 
players  of  both  sides,  the  ball  is  out  of  play  and  the  serving 
side  serves  again. 

3.  Dribbling   (i.e.  keeping  the  ball  in  the  air  by  one  player  hitting 

it  quickly  and  repeatedly). 

4.  Sending  the  ball  under  the  net. 

5.  Sending  the  ball  out  of  the  court. 

6.  Catching  the  ball  and  holding  it  even  for  an  instant. 

4.  Score:     Except  for  fouls,    a   side  scores   only   when   serving.     Failure 

to  return  the  ball  merely  puts  the  serving  side  out  (i.e.  "changes 
the  serve"). 

1.  A  good  serve  unreturned  scores  one  point  for  the  serving  side. 

2.  A  point  is  also  scored  by  the  serving  side  if  opponents  fail  to 

return  a  ball  that  is  in  play. 

3.  A  ball  sent  out  of  bounds  by  the  receiving  side  in  returning  a 

service  scores  one  point  for  the  serving  side. 

4.  A  foul  made  by  either  side  counts  one  point  for  opponents. 

5.  Time:     Two  halves  of  10  minutes.     Rest  of  3  minutes. 

III.    NEWCOMB 

Rule  book  purchasable  from  A.  G.  Spalding  &  Bros..  45  Rose  St.,  New  York 
City. 

Field:  Rectangular  field  40x92  feet,  regulation  size.  Any  smaller  avail- 
able space  may  be  used.  Field  divided  by  rope  or  net  stretched  across  center 
(like  tennis  net)  6  to  S  feet  from  ground ;  depending  on  the  age  of  the  players. 

Equipment:    Volley  ball  or  basketball.     Rope  or  net. 


110  Physical  Education 

Organization:  Appoint  an  umpire,  a  scorer,  time  keeper,  and  two  captains. 
Game  divided  into  two  halves,  lasting  from  8  to  10  minutes  each,  according 
to  the  age  of  the  players.  Equal  sides,  preferably  15  on  a  side.  Captains 
station  teams  in  courts,  covering  all  space  possible,  smaller  ones  nearer  the 
net  or  rope  and  the  taller  ones,  and  those  who  can  throw  farthest,  in  back. 

Object  of  game:  To  throw  ball  so  as  to  make  it  touch  clear  space  in  op- 
ponent's territory ;  to  make  opponent  drop  or  send  the  ball  into  neutral  terri- 
tory or  "out  of  bounds."  (N.  B.  A  ball  is  "out  of  bounds"  when  it  lands  en- 
tirely outside  the  boundary  lines.)  If  the  throwing  side  sends  a  ball  over  the 
net  fairly  and  the  ball  lands  on  the  opponent's  boundary  line  it  is  considered 
'"in"    (as  in  tennis). 

Method  of  play:  To  decide  which  side  shall  start  the  ball,  it  is  tossed  up 
between  the  two  captains,  standing  in  neutral  territory,  and  goes  to  the  side 
whose  captain  first  touches  the  ball  in  the  "touch  off."  Ball  is  thrown  with 
one  hand  and  may  be  caught  with  two  hands.  In  throwing,  player  is  allowed 
to  take  only  one  step  with  ball.  Sides  alternate  throwing  the  ball.  Swift 
balls  hardest  to  catch.     Sides  change  courts  after  first  half. 

Score:  Balls  sent  by  the  throwing  side  which  are  not  caught  and  which 
land  in  the  opponent's  territory  score  one  for  the  throwing  side. 

Balls  sent  by  the  throwing  side  and  dropped  by  any  one  on  the  receiving 
side  score  one  for  the  throwing  side. 

Balls  fumbled  by  receiving  side  which  fall  in  neutral  territory  or  "out  of 
bounds"  score  one  for  the  throwing  side, 

Balls  sent  over  the  net  fairly  by  the  throwing  side  and  landing  in  neutral 
territory  or  "out  of  bounds"  score  one  for  the  receiving  side.  (N.  B.  Players 
going  after  the  ball  which  has  been  sent  "out  of  bounds"  should  throw  the 
ball  in  to  save  time.) 

Fouls  score  one  point  for  the  opposing  side,  as  follows : 

Balls  sent  under  the  net  by  the  throwing  side  score  one  point  for  the  receiv- 
ing side. 

Balls  sent  by  the  throwing  side  which  hit  the  net  score  one  for  the  receiv- 
ing side. 

Taking  more  than  one  step  with  the  ball  when  throwing  scores  one  for 
the  opposing  side. 

Stepping  into  neutral  territory  when  throwing  or  receiving  the  ball  scores 
one  for  the  opposing  side.  (This  does  not  refer  to  recovering  the  ball  after 
it  has  been  dropped.) 

Holding  the  ball  more  than  3  seconds  when  it  should  be  delivered  scores  one 
for  the  opposing  side. 

IV.    ATHLETIC  BADGE  TEST  FOR  BOYS 

The  athletic  badge  test  is  competition,  not  against  individual  rivals,  but 
against  standards.     It  is  a  test  of  development  and  physical  efficiency. 

Any  list  of  individual  athletic  events  might  be  selected  and  standardized  as 
a  development  test,  but  the  athletic  badge  test  represents  a  very  simple  list 
of  important  events  selected  and  standardized  by  experts  of  the  Playground 
and   Recreation  Association  of  America. 


Athletic  Contests 


111 


Fibst  Test 

1.  Pull-Up    (chinning)  4 
or  Rope  Climb  (using  both  nanus  and 
legs ) 

2.  Standing  Broad  Jump 

3.  60-yard  Dash 
or  50-yard  Dash 

4.  Baseball  Throw    (accuracy) 


times 

12  feet 
5  feet  9  inches 
9  seconds 
S  seconds 
3  strikes  out  of  6  throws  at  40  ft. 


or  Baseball  Throw   (distance) 


1.  Pull-Up   (chinning) 
or  Rope  Climb  (using  both  hands  and 
legs) 

2.  Standing   Broad   Jump 
or  Running  Broad  Jump 

3.  60-yard   Dash 

or  100-yard  Dash 

4.  Baseball    Throw    (accuracy) 


130  feet 

Second  Test 

6  times 


or   Baseball  Throw    (distance) 


16  feet 

6  feet  6  inches 
12  feet 

8  seconds 
13%  seconds 

3  strikes  out  of  5  throws  at  45  ft. 
195  feet 


Pull-Up    (chinning) 

or  Rope  Climb    (using  hands  only 

Running    High   Jump 

or   Running  Broad   Jump 

220-yard   Run 

or   100-yard   Dash 

Baseball  Throw    (distance) 

or  Baseball  Throw   (accuracy) 

or  S  lb.  Shot  Put 


Third  Test 

9  times 


16  feet 

4  feet  4  inches 
14  feet 
28  seconds 
12%  seconds 
220  feet 

3  strikes  out  of  5  throws  at  50  ft. 
2S  feet 


It  has  been  found  that  boys  of  12  years  of  age  should  be  able  to  qualify 
for  the  badge  under  the  first  test,  elementary  school  boys  of  13  years  and  over 
for  the  second  test,  and  high  scbool  boys  for  the  third  test.  It  does  not  seem, 
however,  that  the  different  standards  should  be  limited  to  these  age  groups. 
Accordingly  no  age  or  even  weight  limit  is  fixed.  Any  boy  may  enter  any 
test  at  any  time. 

It  is  generally  agreed  "that  climbing,  jumping,  running  and  throwing 
should  be  considered  the  four  fundamental  activities  to  be  included  in  any 
physical  efficiency  test,"  and  accordingly  each  of  the  three  tests  makes  use  of 
four  events.  Certain  options  are  allowed  to  make  the  tests  adaptable  to  varied 
local  conditions,  and  to  allow  choice  of  those  activities  most  interesting  to 
the  boys  of  any  locality.  To  pass  a  test  a  boy  must  qualify  in  four  events, 
one  from  each  of  the  four  classes,  climbing,  jumping,  running  and  throwing. 

Rules 

No  boy  is  permitted  to  receive  more  than  one  badge  in  any  one  year. 

It  is  necessary  to  qualify  at  one  time  in  the  four  events  in  any  one  test 
to  win  a  badge.  If  a  boy  fails  in  the  tests  one  day  he  should  be  permitted 
to  practice  until  he  can  pass  the  tests. 


112 


Physical  Education 


Any  responsible  adult  may  give  the  tests. 

Even  though  a  boy  has  not  received  a  first  test  badge  he  may  qualify 
for  a  badge  of  a  higher  order. 

In  order  to  prevent  the  badges  from  falling  into  the  hands  of  boys  who  have 
not  passed  the  tests  and  are  therefore  not  entitled  to  have  the  badges,  the 
Badge  Test  Committee  has  found  it  wise  to  allow  no  sample  badges  to  be 
sent  out.  It  is  suggested,  in  instances  where  it  seems  desirable  to  have 
badges  at  once  for  the  purpose  of  arousing  interest  in  the  badge  tests,  that  a 
few  of  the  boys  be  given  the  tests  immediately. 

All  tests  must  be  made  without  the  aid  of  spiked  or  eleated  shoes  of  any 
sort;  tennis  or  gymnasium  shoes  are  allowed. 

There  shall  be  one  trial  only  in  the  chinning,  the  rope  climb  and  the 
running  events.  Three  trials  are  allowed  in  the  jumps  and  the  throws 
except  the  baseball  for  accuracy. 

Schools  selecting  the  "Athletic  Badge  Test"  for  adoption  should  send 
for  the  pamphlet  explaining  how  the  badges  and  certificates  may  be  secured. 
Playground  and  Recreation  Association  of  America,  315  Fourth  Avenue, 
New  York.    Price  five  cents. 


V.    ATHLETIC  BADGE  TEST  FOR  GIRLS 

The  Playground  and  Recreation  Association  of  America  has  adopted  the 
following  as  standards  which  every  normal  girl  ought  to  be  able  to  attain : 


Fibst  Test  : 

1.  Balancing  (1  deep  knee  bend) 

2.  Either : 
Potato  Race, 

or  All-up  Indian  Club  Race, 
or  50- Yard  Dash 

3.  Either : 

Basket-ball  Throw    (distance), 
or  12  in.  Indoor  Baseball  Throw 
(accuracy) 

4.  Either : 

Volley  Ball  Serve, 

or  Tennis  Serve, 

or  Basketball  Goal  Throw  (10  foot  line) 

12  in.  Indoor  Baseball  Throw  and  Catch 


24  ft.  2  trials 

22  seconds 

30  seconds 

8  seconds 

35  feet 
2  strikes  out  of  5  throws  at 
25  feet 

2  in  5 

3  in  6 

2  in  5 

3  errors  allowed 


Second  Test: 

1.  Balancing    (book   on   head,   1   deep  knee 

bend) 

2.  Either : 
Potato  Race, 

or  All-up  Indian  Club  Race, 
or  Run  and  Catch, 
or  50- Yard  Dash 


24  ft.  2  trials 

20  seconds 
28  seconds 
19  seconds 
7  3/5  seconds 


Athletic  Contests 


113 


Either : 

Basketball  Throw   (distance), 

or  12  in.  Indoor  Baseball  Throw 

(accuracy) 

Either  : 

Volley  Ball  Serve, 

or  Tennis  Serve, 

or  Basketball  Goal  Throw  (12  foot  line) 

12  in.  Indoor  Baseball  Throw  and  Catch 


45  feet 
3  strikes  out  of  6  throws  at 
30  ft. 

3  in  6 
3  in  5 
3  in  G 
2  errors  allowed 


Third  Test  : 

1.  Balancing    (book   on   head,   3   deep   knee 

bends) 

2.  Either : 
Potato  Race,  or 

or  Run  and  Catch, 
or  50-Yard  Dash 

3.  Either: 

Basketball  Throw  (distance),  or 
or  12  in.  Indoor  Baseball  Throw 
(accuracy) 

4.  Either : 

Volley  Ball  Serve,  or 

or  Tennis  Serve, 

or  Basketball  Goal  Throw  (15  foot  line), 

or  12  in.  Indoor  Baseball  Throw  and 

Catch 


24  ft.  2  trials 

IS  seconds 
17  seconds 
7  1/5  seconds 

55  feet 
3  strikes  out  of  5  throws  at 
36  ft. 

3  in  5 
3  in  4 
3  in  5 
1  error  allowed 


VI.    RULES   FOR  TESTS 

There  are  no  height,  weight  or  age  limits  in  the  Athletic  Badge  Tests 
for  Girls,  but  an  attempt  has  been  made  to  providp  tests  of  progressive 
difficulty.  Certain  options  have  been  provided  to  make  the  tests  adaptable 
to  local  conditions  and  to  allow  a  choice  of  those  activities  most  interesting 
to  the  girls  in  any  locality.  To  win  a  badge  in  any  test  a  girl  must  qualify 
in  one  event  in  each  of  the  four  groups  in  that  test. 

The  following  general  rules  shall  govern  the  final  tests :  Unless  otherwise 
stated  in  these  rules  there  shall  be  but  one  trial  in  each  event.  If  a  girl 
fails  in  the  tests  one  day  she  should  be  permitted  to  practice  until  she  can 
pass  the  tests. 

It  is  necessary  to  qualify  at  one  time  in  all  four  events  in  any  test  in  order 
to  win  a  badge. 

A  girl  may  not  earn  more  than  one  badge  in  each  of  the  three  tests,  nor 
having  received  a  badge  may  she  compete  for  a  badge  of  a  higher  class 
until  six  months  have  elapsed. 

Even  though  a  girl  has  not  received  a  badge  in  a  lower  grade,  she  may 
qualify  for  one  of  a  higher  order. 

In  order  to  prevent  the  badges  from  falling  into  the  hands  of  girls 
who  have  not  passed  the  tests  and  are  therefore  not  entitled   to  have  the 


Phys. — 8 


114  Physical  Education 

badges,  the  Badge  Test  Committee  has  found  it  wise  to  allow  no  sample 
badges  to  be  sent  out.  It  is  suggested,  in  instances  where  it  seems  desirable 
to  have  badges  at  once  for  the  purpose  of  arousing  interest  in  the  badge 
tests,  that  a  few  of  the  girls  be  given  the  test  immediately.  Certification 
blanks  will  be  sent  from  the  office  of  the  Playground  and  Recreation  Associa- 
tion of  America,  315  Fourth  Avenue,  New  York  City,  upon  request  and 
prompt  attention  will  be  given  to  orders  for  badges. 

VII.    DIRECTIONS  FOR  EVENTS 

All  Up  Indian  Club  Race:  Draw  two  tangent  circles,  each  three  feet 
in  diameter.  In  one  of  the  circles  place  three  Indian  clubs.  At  a  point 
thirty  feet  from  a  line  passed  through  the  center  of  the  circles,  and  parallel 
to  it,  draw  a  line  to  be  used  as  a  starting  line. 

On  the  signal  the  girl  runs  from  the  starting  line,  transfers  the  three 
clubs,  one  after  the  other,  to  the  vacant  circle  so  that  they  remain  standing, 
and  runs  back  to  the  starting  line.  The  girl  makes  three  such  trips  finishing 
at  the  starting  line.  The  girl  is  permitted  to  use  but  one  hand  in  transferring 
the  clubs.  The  surface  within  the  circles  should  be  smooth  and  level.  A  wide 
board  may  be  used  when  the  test  is  made  out  of  doors. 

To  qualify  in  this  event  for  a  first  test  badge  a  girl  must  make  the  three 
trips  to  the  circles  in    thirty  seconds. 

To  qualify  in  this  event  for  a  second  test  badge  a  girl  must  make  the 
three  trips  to  the  circle  in  twenty-eight  seconds. 

Potato  Race:  Secure  two  wooden  cubes  measuring  2y2  inches.  (Pota- 
toes of  uniform  size  or  bean  bags  may  be  used).  Mark  upon  the  floor  or 
ground  five  yards  in  front  of  the  starting  line  a  square  measuring  12  inches 
in  outside  dimensions.  Five  yards  further  on  mark  a  circle  6  inches  in 
diameter,  and  five  yards  beyond  this  a  second  6-inch  circle.  Distances 
should  be  measured  to  center  of  square  and  circles.  Place  a  block  in  each 
of  the  6-inch  circles.  At  the  word  of  command,  the  contestant  runs  from 
the  starting  line,  picks  up  the  nearest  block  and  places  it  in  the  square, 
runs  and  secures  the  farther  block,  touches  square  with  it  and  replaces 
it  in  the  farther  circle,  then  goes  back,  picks  up  the  other  block,  places  it  in  the 
nearer  circle  and  returns  to  the  starting  line.  Total  distance  is  70  yards. 
Blocks  may  not  be  dropped  or  thrown  but  must  be  placed  in  every  case. 
One  try  only  is  allowed,  but  the  event  must  be  run  over  if  either  of  the  blocks 
is  placed  outside  of  the  circle  or  the  square.  It  is  permissible  to  have  the 
block  on  the  line  if  it  is  more  in  than  out. 

Basketball  Goal  Throw:  The  regular  basketball  goal  may  be  used  or 
a  ring  eighteen  inches  in  diameter  (inside).  It  should  be  placed  ten  feet 
above  the  ground  and  the  inside  rim  should  extend  six  inches  from  the 
surface  to  which  it  is  attached.  From  a  point  directly  under  the  center 
of  the  goal,  semicircles  should  be  drawn  with  radii  of  ten,  twelve  and 
fifteen  feet,  for  throwing  lines. 

The  girl  may  stand  at  any  point  outside  of,  but  touching  the  throwing 
line  for  her  event.    The  basketball  used  shall  be  of  standard  size  and  weight. 

The  goal  may  be  made  either  by  a  clear  throw  or  by  bouncing  against 
the  backboard. 

Five  or  six  throws,  as  the  case  may  be,  shall  count  as  one  trial. 


Athletic  Contests  115 

Balancing  Test :  A  standard  balance  beam  twelve  feet  long  and  two  inches 
wide  may  be  used,  or  a  two  by  four-inch  plank  set  on  the  two-inch  side. 
The  length  shall  be  twelve  feet. 

There  is  no  time  limit  in  this  event  but  there  should  be  an  endeavor 
to  meet  the  requirements  promptly,  without  haste  and  with  perfect  poise. 
Two  trials  are  allowed  in  the  balancing  events. 

In  the  first  test  the  girl  starts  from  the  center  of  the  beam,  walks  a 
half  turn,  and  balancing  with  toes  on  beam,  holding  head  up  and  body  erect, 
makes  deep  knee  bend,  coming  to  full  squat  on  heels.  Rising  she  completes 
turn,  walks  forward  to  end  of  beam,  makes  full  turn  and  walks  to  center 
of  beam,  the  starting  point. 

The  second  test  is  the  same  as  the  first  except  that  the  girl  must  throughout 
the  test  have  a  book  balanced  upon  her  head.  For  the  sake  of  uniformity 
this  book  should  be  a  12mo  (5"x7")  book  with  stiff  board  covers  weigh- 
ing from  three-quarters  of  a  pound  to  one  pound.  The  person  giving  the 
test  should  see  that  the  girl's  hair  is  not  arranged  in  such  a  manner  as  to 
assist  in  supporting  the  book  or  making  the  balancing  easier. 

The  third  test  is  the  same  as  the  second  except  that  the  girl  must  keep 
her  hands  on  her  hips  throughout  the  test  and  must  make  three  deep  knee 
bends  in  succession  in  place  of  one. 

Running  and  Catching :  At  a  distance  of  thirty  feet  from  the  starting 
line  and  parallel  to  it,  stretch  a  cord  ten  feet  from  the  ground. 

On  the  signal  the  girl  runs  from  the  starting  line,  tosses  a  basketball  or 
a  volley-ball  over  the  cord,  catches  it,  and  runs  back  to  the  starting  line. 
Three  such  trips  are  made,  finishing  at  the  starting  line.  In  case  of  failure  to 
catch  the  ball,  it  must  be  secured,  tossed  over  the  cord  (either  direction)  and 
caught  before  continuing  the  run. 

The  starting  line  and  the  cord  should  both  be  well  away  from  any  wall, 
backstop,  or  other  object,  so  that  neither  the  contestant  nor  the  ball 
shall  touch  any  obstruction  during  the  run. 

Basketball  Throio  for  Distance:  The  primary  consideration  here  is 
distance,  although  the  ball  should  be  kept  within  a  fairly  well  defined  area, 
possibly  the  width  of  a  road  or  track.  Any  number  of  steps  shall  be 
allowed  but  tbe  thrower  must  not  step  over  the  line  in  making  the  throw 
as  this  counts  as  one  trial.  Measuring  may  be  simplified  by  placing 
markers  at  the  specified  distances. 

The  "official"  basketball  should  be  used.  Any  style  of  throw  is  allowed, 
sidearm  or  overhand,  one  or  two  hand. 

Volley  Ball  Serve :  A  volley-ball  net  or  piece  of  cord  shall  be  stretched 
at  a  height  of  eight  feet  across  the  center  of  the  playing  space.  Twenty- 
four  feet  distant  a  line  shall  be  drawn  on  the  floor  or  ground  parallel  to 
the  net.  The  contestant  with  volley-ball  in  hand  shall  stand  facing  the  net 
and  toeing  the  line  with  either  foot.  She  tosses  the  ball  with  one  hand  as  in 
tennis  and  strikes  it  with  tbe  other  hand  over  the  net  so  that  it  will  fall 
within  a  square  ten  by  ten  feet.  This  square  shall  be  marked  on  the 
floor  or  ground  ten  feet  from  the  net  and  at  right  angles  to  it.  If  the 
contestant  steps  forward  over  the  line  before  the  ball  strikes  the  ground, 
no  score  is  allowed,  but  it  counts  as  one  serve. 


116  Physical  Education 

Five  or  six  serves,  as  the  case  may  be,  shall  count  as  one  trial.  The 
serve  may  be  made  either  underhand  or  overhand. 

Tennis  Serve :  Upon  a  wall  mark  a  space  13%  feet  long  and  30  inches  wide, 
the  lower  line  of  the  rectangle  being  36  inches  from  the  floor  or  ground. 
A  line  is  drawn  on  the  floor  or  ground  38  feet  from  the  wall  and  parallel 
to  it.  Upon  this  line  is  marked  a  13%  foot  space  directly  opposite  the  13% 
foot  space  on  the  wall.  In  making  the  serve  the  girl  must  stand  behind  this  38 
foot  line,  but  she  may  not  be  within  the  13%  foot  space  marked  on  this  line. 
The  ball  may  strike  the  upper  line  and  be  good  but  must  clear  the  lower  line. 

This  event  may  be  given  upon  a  standard  tennis  court,  and  in  this  case  a 
second  tennis  net  must  be  stretched  above  the  regular  net,  leaving  a  space 
of  30  inches  between  the  two  nets,  the  serve  being  "driven"  through  this  space 
into  the  service  area.  This  is  designed  to  prevent  qualification  for  this 
event  by  an  easy  "lob"  into  the  service  area — no  real  test  of  ability  to  serve. 

Four,  five  or  six  serves,  as  the  case  may  be,  shall  count  as  one  trial. 

Indoor  Baseball  Throw  and  Catch  :  On  an  indoor  or  playground  diamond 
with  36  foot  base-lines  and  a  30  foot  pitcher's  box,  place  a  pitcher  and  three 
basemen.  Contestant  stands  at  home.  She  must  catch  the  ball  delivered  from 
the  pitcher,  throw  to  first  and  catch  the  return,  throw  to  second,  catch  the 
return,  throw  to  third,  and  catch  the  return.  She  thus  must  catch  four  throws 
and  throw  to  each  of  the  three  bases,  giving  a  possible  seven  errors.  A  throw 
by  the  girl  or  to  her  shall  be  judged  as  being  good  if  both  hands  can  be 
placed  upon  it  by  stretching  with  either  foot  on  the  base.  In  case  of  a 
bad  throw  to  her  the  throw  should  be  repeated.  A  bad  throw  by  her  shall 
be  an  error.    The  official  12  inch  baseball  must  be  used. 

Twelve  Inch  Indoor  Baseball  Throw  for  Accuracy :  Make  a  target  15 
inches  by  24  inches  of  wood  or  canvas  to  represent  the  area  within  which  a 
"strike"  must  be  thrown.  Suspend  this  target  about  a  foot  or  two  in  front 
of  a  backstop  of  wire,  a  fence,  or  a  mat  in  the  gymnasium.  The  lower  edge 
of  the  target  should  be  24  inches  from,  the  floor.  A  strike  is  any  throw 
that  hits  the  target  enough  to  move  it  at  all.  (Care  must  be  taken  to  see  that 
the  ball  hits  the  target  directly  and  not  on  the  bounce  or  the  rebound.) 

The  thrower  shall  stand  facing  the  target  with  both  feet  upon  the  line 
indicating  the  distance  specified  for  the  event.  In  delivering  the  ball,  which 
should  be  the  official  12  inch  indoor  baseball,  she  may  step  forward  with  either 
foot,  but  her  other  foot  must  be  up  on  the  line  when  the  ball  is  thrown. 
Either  underhand  or  overhand  delivery  shall  be  allowed. 

Five  or  six  throws,  as  the  case  may  be,  shall  count  as  one  trial. 


SCHOOL  FESTIVALS 

In  spite  of  the  scores  of  possible  subjects,  there  are  only  two  kinds  of 
school  festivals ;  first,  the  type  in  which  school  time  and  effort  is  expended 
for  a  spectacle  or  an  entertainment,  and  second,  the  type  in  which  the  festi- 
val is  a  summary  of  the  daily  work  in  music,  in  physical  education,  in 
English,  in  art,  or  in  history  or  geography.  The  first  type  can  only  be 
detrimental  to  school  morale ;  school  time  is  too  precious  to  be  spent  in 
amusement.  The  second  type  is  tremendously  valuable  in  correlating  and 
in  visualizing  the  different  school  subjects.  If  the  festival  is  made  to 
include  the  entire  school,  instead  of  a  few  star  performers ;  if  the  subject  is 
one  toward  which  the  general  school  work  has  been  tending,  and  if  the  songs, 
the  games,  the  dances  and  the  spoken  parts  have  been  developed  as  part  of 
the  regular  daily  work,  then  the  festival  has  a  definite  and  legitimate  claim 
to  be  considered  as  an  educational  project. 

SUGGESTED  FESTIVAL  OUTLINES 

I.  Old  King  Cole  :  For  an  elementary  and  primary  school,  of  two  or 
three  hundred  children.  The  stage  is  the  school  yard  or  athletic  field, 
an  open  grassy  stretch,  preferably  with  trees ;  at  the  side  the  audience  is 
seated.     At  the  left  center  is  a  rustic  throne  prepared  for  Old  King  Cole. 

The  festival  begins  with  the  entrance  of  groups  of  children  from  various 
directions,  gathering  on  the  green  to  watch  for  King  Cole  and  his  train, 
who  are  expected  to  pass  through  the  village.  While  the  children  wait, 
they  play  various  suitable  games,  such  as  Round  and  Round  the  Village, 
London  Bridge,  Three  Dukes,  Sally  Waters,  etc. 

Presently  one-  child  points  out  the  approach  of  the  royal  party,  coming 
from  the  right.  King  Cole  is  riding  on  a  gaily  decked  pony  or  donkey, 
followed  by  the  various  characters  in  Mother  Goose,  and  by  children  in 
simple  white  dresses.  The  waiting  children  separate,  leaving  a  passage 
for  the  royal  procession,  which  halts  between  the  lines  of  welcoming 
subjects..  When  the  king  sees  the  throne  prepared  for  him,  he  decides  to 
rest  and  view  the  children's  games.  His  pages  assist  him  to  dismount,  and 
group  themselves,  with  his  followers,  around  his  throne.  The  king  calls 
for  his  pipe  and  his  bowl,  in  succession,  brought  by  pages ;  his  "fiddlers 
three"  can  be  used  to  supply  music  for  the  games  which  are  to  follow. 
The  suggested  games  and  dances  are  only  a  few  of  the  many  suitable  ones 
for  a  program  of  this  type. 

1.  Singing  games ;  Pussy  Cat ;  Sing  a  Song  o'  Sixpence ;  Hickory,  Dickory, 
Dock ;   Little  Jack  Horner ;   The   Circus ;    Children's  Polka ;    Bean   Porridge. 

2.  Dances ;  Swedish  Ring ;  Seven  Jumps ;  Dan  Tucker ;  Sir  Roger  de 
Coverley  (Virginia  Reel)  ; Pop  Goes  the  Weasel;  Irish  Long  Dance;  Scotch 
Reel ;  Comin'  Through  the  Rye. 

3.  Boys  as  clowns,  for  tumbling  acts ;  atheletic  events,  such  as  jumping, 
throwing,  etc.,  can  be  performed  for  the  amusement  of  the  king. 

4.  Maypole  Dances. 

5.  "Daffy-down-dilly,"  in  crepe  paper  costumes ;  folk  dance  by  little  girls. 


118  Physical  Education 

6.  Wee  Willie  Winkie,  in  night-gown  and  with  bell  for  curfew,  comes 
to  send  children  to  bed ;  children,  singing,  follow  him  off  to  right ;  king  and 
his  train  exit  to  left. 

II.     Health  Festival  : — The  Court  of  Common-Sense. 

The  Queen  of  Health  is  on  a  visit  to  King  Common-Sense,  who  is  giving 
a  festival  in  her  honor.  Entrance  procession  of  King  and  Queen,  with 
pages,  heralds  and  subjects. 

Suggested  games  and  dances ;  Jolly  Miller,  Brownie  Polka,  The  Spielman, 
Ring  Dance,  Seven  Jumps,  Nuts  in  May,  etc. 

Enter  witch  Ignorance,  who  beckons,  one  by  one,  the  Grimy-Joes,  in 
dirty  overalls  (Pop  Goes  the  Weasel  danced  by  them);  Pickles;  Frying- 
pan  ;  Coffee-pot,  each  with  characteristic  pantomime  or  dance.  The  children 
are  driven  to  the  rear  of  the  stage  by  the  intruders. 

The  Queen  of  Health  appeals  to  heralds  to  summon  her  guard  to  drive 
off  the  followers  of  Ignorance.     Then  appear  in  succession : 

1.  Fresh  Air  Fairies. 

2.  Soap  Spirits ;  Tooth  Brush  Brigade  drill. 

3.  Exercise  Boys,  in  scout  uniform  or  gymnasium  suits ;  these  do  drill  or 
stunts. 

4.  Lads  of  laughter,  clowns,  with  grotesque  stunts. 

5.  Duet,  song  or  dance ;  Minnie  Spinach  and  Charlie  Carrot. 

6.  Lettuce  Lassies;  group  dance.     Green  crepe  paper  skirts,  very  ruffled. 
As  each  of  these  of  the  Health  Queen's  guard  presents  his  contribution, 

the  forces  of  Ignorance  withdraw  further  to  the  rear.  As  the  program  is 
about  to  end,  the  herald  reads  the  Queen's  proclamation — the  Health  Chores, 
or  whatever  health  rules  have  been  adopted  by  the  school. 

Finale ;  all  the  cast  join  in  some  simple  circle  dance,  such  as  the  i>ench 
May,  and  the  program  should  be  closed  with  the  school  song. 

III.     Under  The  Stars  And  Stripes 
a  festival  op  citizenship 

Raised  platform  at  center  back  of  stage;  flat  space  in  front  for  dancers. 
Chorus  grouped  at  side. 

As  the  group  representing  each  nation  enters,  the  leader  presents  to 
Uncle  Sam  a  small  national  flag  or  the  colors  of  the  nation  represented. 

Enter  Herald ;  Columbia  ;  Uncle  Sam,  preceded  by  three  flfe-and-drummer 
boys  in  scout  costume.  Columbia  sits  on  a  low  bench  in  the  center  of  the 
raised  platform,  Uncle  Sam  stands  at  her  right ;  scouts  in  rear. 

1.     Prologue — Columbia  comes  forward. 

Whenever  we  think  of  our  country's  greatness,  its  power  and  wealth,  we 
remember  those  who  crossed  the  seas  in  that  far  yesterday  when  this 
mighty  land  was  but  a  dream.  We  remember,  too,  those  later  pilgrims 
whose  eager  hopes  have  led  them  to  the  feet  of  liberty. 

It  is  for  them  that  here  today  we  hold  high  festival  together.  From 
many  lands  they  came,  seeking  freedom  for  themselves,  but  also  bearing 
gracious  gifts  of  courage,  love,  and  beauty  which  they  have  woven  into  the 
tapestry  of  the  Nation. 


School  Festivals  119 

From  the  heroic  past  there  comes  to  you  at  this  hour  those  daring  lovers 
of  great  liberty  who  have  built  the  young  republic. 

(From   outside  comes   the  last  verse  of   "America,    The   Beautiful." 
"O  beautiful  for  patriot's  dreams,"  etc. 

2.  Herald  reads  from  his  scroll : 

First  there  come  the  forest  people ; 

Scattered  far  have  been  their  nation, 

Felled  their  forest  pines  and  oak  trees, 

But  their  bravery  and  courage, 

True  and  lofty  aspirations, 

May  our  country  hold  forever. 
Enter   chief,   followed   by   council ;   bring  gift  of  wampum   to   Uncle    Sam. 
Tribe  holds  ceremonial ;   "War  Dance ;"  then  the  Indians  stand  on  opposite 
wing  from  chorus.     Indian  Song :     "From  the  Land  of  the  Sky-Blue  Water." 

3.  Herald :     Far  across  the  pathless  ocean. 

Led  by  hopes  of  high  adventure. 
Bringing  love  of  life  and  beauty 
Came  the  bold  and  daring  Spaniard. 
Enter  group  of  Spanish  peasants ;  leader  presents  flag  or  colors  to  Uncle 
Sam.     Spanish  peasant  dance.     Chorus  siugs  Spanish  ballad   "La   Cachuca." 

4.  Herald  :     Little  Holland's  sturdy  settlers 

Bringing  valor,  wisdom,  patience, 
Builded  well  a  sure  foundation 
For  this  nation  of  the  future. 
Dutch    group    enters ;    wooden    shoe    dance.      Chorus    sings    Dutch    ballad : 
"Song  of  the  Wooden  Shoon." 

5.  Herald  :     Sunny  France  has  sent  brave  spirits 

Bringing  love  of  home  and  country 
Willing  hands  and  dauntless  courage. 
Enter    French    peasants ;    French    May    Dance.      French    National    Hymn : 
"La  Marseillaise." 

6.  Herald  :     Hail  the  shamrock,  rose  and  thistle ! 

Mother  country,  Nation-builder, 

Champion  of  Law  and  Justice, 

Honor  to  thy  sons  and  daughters 

Who  through  hardship,  hunger,  danger. 

Never  doubted,   never  faltered, 

Till  their  vision  saw  fulfilment, 

From  a  wilderness,  a  nation. 
Enter  dancers  in  national  costumes ;  Irish  Reel ;  Highland  Schottische :  Sir 
Roger  de  Coverley.    Chorus  sings  ballads  of  the  United  Kingdom :    "O  dear, 
What   can   the   Matter    Be."    "The   Minstrel   Boy,"    and    "The   Blue    Bells    of 
Scotland." 

7.  Herald  :     Music,  dancing,  love  and  laughter, 

Happy  hearts  and  youth  eternal. 
Love  of  life  and  joy  and  beauty 
Children  of  Italia  bring  us. 
Group  of  Italian  musicians,  guitars  slung  with  gay  ribbons  around  their 
necks.     Dance,  Tarantella :   Chorus  sing  Italian  street  song,   "Santa  Lucia." 


120  Physical  Education 

Herald  :     Children  of  the  far-off  Northland, 

Sturdy,  faithful,  true  and  tender, 

Poets,  sages,  dreamers,  workers, 

Scandinavia,  we  greet  thee. 
Group   of  Norwegian  peasants   in   national   dance ;    Chorus   sings   national 
anthem,  "A  Psalm  of  Peace." 

9.     Herald :     Glorious  Russia,  mighty  nation, 

Through  the  ages  held  in  bondage, 

Welcome,  latest-born  republic, 

Sacrificing  all  for  freedom ! 
Russian  Cossack  dance ;     Russian  Folk  Song,  "Bereza  Tree." 
Uncle  Sam  comes  forward,  holding  the  flags  of  the  nations. 
Uncle  Sam :    From  the  distant  ends  of  nowhere, 

Many  men  of  many  races 

Have  come  seeking  what  they  dreamed  of. 

Liberty,  a  torch  before  them 

Raised  their  minds  above  the  market, 

Waked  the  mighty  souls  within  them, 

Stirred  their  hearts  with  noble  passion, 

Gave  their  souls  a  clearer  vision. 

Thus  the  folk  shall  be  united 

For  the  shaping  of  the  future. 

Bring  your  gifts,  oh  ancient  peoples, 

One  and  all  be  they  devoted 

To  Law,  Liberty  and  Service ! 

This  your  vision  of  the  future, 

This  the  thing  ye  stand  or  die  for. 

From  the  hearts  of  a  free  people, 

From  the  lips  of  me,  their  spokesman, 

I  foretell  the  thing  that  shall  be ; 

Never  more  among  the  nations 

Shall  we  suffer  war  for  plunder ; 

Fight  we  shall,  if  Heaven  wills  it, 

To  maintain  among  the  nations 

Ancient  Law  and  general  Freedom. 

But  the  fighting  of  the  future 

Shall  be  battles   of  the  spirit, 

For  the  service  of  all  peoples, 

For  relief  of  the  down-trodden, 

For  the  healing  ancient  sorrows. 

Lo.  the  Stars  and  Stripes  above  us 

Shine  for  Freedom,  Law  and  Service, 

Mark  the  pathway  of  the  Future ! 

American  flag  unfurled ;  audience,  chorus  and  dancers  join  in  first  verse 
of.  the  Star-Spangled  Banner. 


REFERENCES 

1.  Bancroft,  Jessie ;  Games  for  School,  Home  Playground  and  Gymnasium ; 
Macmillan. 

2.  Michigan    Course    of    Study    in    Physical    Education ;    Department    of 
Education,  Lansing,  Michigan. 

3.  Health  by  Stunts ;  Pearl  and  Brown.     Macmillan,  New  York. 

4.  Badge    Tests,    Girls'    and    Boys'    edition,    Playground    and    Recreation 
Association  of  America,  354  Madison  Avenue,  New  York  City. 

5.  Crampton ;    The    Folk    Dance    Book ;    The    Second    Folk    Dance    Book ; 
A.  S.  Barnes,  New  York. 

6.  Burchenal ;  Folk  Dances  and  Singing  Games ;  Schirmer,  New  York. 

7.  Clark ;     Physical    Education    for    Elementary    Schools ;    Sanborn,    New 
York. 

8.  Halsey  and  Skarstrom ;  Schoolroom  Gymnastic  Lessons. 

9.  Sperling ;  The  Playground  Book ;  A.  S.  Barnes,  New  York. 

10.     Mother  Goose  Melodies.   Published  by  Hinds,  Noble  &   Eldridge,   New 
York. 


INDEX 


A                         Page 
All   Up   Relay 87 

Athletic  Badge  Test 110, 112 

Automobile    Race 67 

B 
Badge    Test 106 

Balancing   Test 115 

Ball: 

Basketball;   Goal  Throw 114 

Distance  Throw 115 

Bat   Ball 107 

Dodge  Ball 88 

End  Ball 99 

Long  Ball 88 

Progressive  Dodge  Ball 88 

Touch  Ball 77 

Soccer'  Dodge    Ball 99 

Volley    Ball 10S 

Bean  Porridge  Hot 57 

Beast,  Bird  or  Fish 67 

Blackboard    Relay 76 

Bird   Catcher 56 

Bowling 87 

Bridge    of   Avignon 42 

Brownies'  Party 31 

Bull  Frog  Relay 68 

C 

Call  Ball 68 

Captain  Jenks 93 

Cat  and  Mice 16 

Center    Base 68 

Children's    Minuet 57 

Christmas    Toys 14 

Christmas   Tree   Decorating 30 

Circus,  the : 

Story-Play    15 

Singing   Game 43 

Circle    Tag 76 

Cleaning    House 32 

Columbus  Discovers  America 12 

Crested   Hen 70 

D 

Did  You  Ever  See  a  Lassie? 37 

Dodge    Ball SS 

Dozen  Ways  of  Getting  There 98 

Drop  the  Handkerchief 16 

Ducks    Fly 56 

Dutch   Dance 90 

E 
End  Ball 99 

Eraser  Relay : 

Number    One 34 

Number  Two  (more  difficult) 56 


Page 

Eskimo  Life 15 

Exchange    Tag 56 

F 

Farmer  in  the  Dell 18 

Festivals  : 

Health    Festival 118 

Old  King  Cole 117 

Under  the   Stars  and   Stripes__118 

Finger   Circle  Relay 55 

Fire   Engines 12 

First  of  May 34 

Flying    Dutchman 68 

Fish  Net 68 

Follow  the  Leader 56 

Fox  and  Squirrel 17 

Four  All  Round 76 

French  Blind  Man's  Buff 77 

French  May  Dance 71 

Frog  Went  A-Courting 23 

G 

Gathering    Vegetables 29 

Gathering  Wood  for  Fire 13 

Geography   Relay 98 

Goal  Throw,  Basketball 114 

Going  to  Jerusalem : 

Number    One 56 

Number   Two 87 

Good   Morning 34 

Grocery    Store 87 

Gustaff's    Skoal 72 

Gymnastic  Lessons,  General 
Plan    of 47 

H 

Have  You  Seen  My  Sheep? 17 

Hawk  and  Dove 33 

Hey.  Diddle.  Diddle 27 

Hickory.    Dickory,    Dock 24 

Highland    Schottische 89 

History   Relay 98 

Hopping    Relay 34 

Horse  and  Rider 87 

Hound  and  Rabbit 34 

How  Animals  Get  Ready  for 

Winter 13 

Hunting 25 

I 

Indian  War   Dance 70 

Imitative  Activities 32 

Indoor  Baseball  Throw  and  Catch_116 
Indoor  Baseball  Throw  for  ac- 
curacy     116 

Initial  Tag 76 


124 


Index 


Page 

Irish   Long  Dance 80 

Itiskit,    Itasket 18 

I   Spy 55 

I  Went  to  Visit  a  Friend  One  Day_  21 

J 

Jack  o'  lantern  (one) 13 

Jack  o'  lantern   (two) 30 

Jenny  Jones 40 

Jolly  is  the  Miller 59 

Jump  the  Brook 34 

Jump  the  Fence 34 

K 
Kick  Pin 99 

L 

Lame    Fox 68 

Land  of  Cotton,  The 80 

Last   Couple   Out 76 

Last   Man 86 

Lawn  Mowing 32 

Little  Pony,   The 43 

Little  Sally  Waters 19 

London    Bridge 22 

Long  Ball 88 

Looby    Loo 26 

M 

Making  a  Garden 15 

Magic  Carpet,  The 17 

May  Pole  Dance 91 

Mazoo 36 

Meet  at  the  Switch 34 

Members  of  the  Fire  Department-  31 

Merry-Go-Round,   The 80 

Minuet : 

Children's   57 

1812    93 

Modes  of  Travel 31 

Morris  Dance 90 

Mother,  May  We  Go  Out  to  Play?  57 

Moving  Day 31 

Mowing  Lawn 32 

Muffin    Man 24 

My  Son  John 25 

N 

Newcomb - 87, 109 

Nixie  Polka 61 

Nose  and  Toe  Tag 98 

Numbers    Change 34 

Nuts  in  May 39 

O 

Oats,  Peas,  Beans  and  Barley 37 

Odd    and    Even _1 87 

Old  Dan  Tucker 102 

Old  Roger  is  Dead 38 

On  a  Farm 29 

Overhead    Relay 35 


P                         Page 
Partner    Tag 75 

Picking    Apples 12 

Playing  in  the  Wind 12 

Playing  With  Leaves 29 

Poison  Snake 56 

Potato  Race 100, 114 

Posture  Tag 67 

Pop  Goes  the  Weasel 80 

Prisoners'    Base 88 

Progressive  Dodge  Ball 88 

Pussy-Cat,    Pussy-Cat 42 

Putting  in  Coal- 13 

R 
Rabbit  in  the  Hollow 35 

Relay  Races : 

All  Up  Relay 114 

Blackboard    Relay 76 

Bull  Frog  Relay 68 

Dozen  Ways  of  Getting  There 98 

Eraser    Relay 34,    56 

Finger  Circle  Relay 55 

Geography   Relay 98 

Grocery    Store 87 

History  Relay 98 

Hopping    Relay 34 

Horse  and  Rider 87 

Overhead    Relay 35 

Relief   Exercises 46, 105 

Rockabye    Baby 28 

Roman    Soldiers 39 

Round  and  Round  the  Village 21 

Rural  Praygrounds : 

Run  for  Your  Supper 16 

Running  and  Catching 115 

S 

Sailor's  Hornpipe 100 

Sally  Waters 19 

Santa  Claus : 

One   (story  play) 14 

Two    (story  play) 30 

Santa  Claus'  Visit :___  30 

Schoolroom  Basketball 98 

See-Saw 26 

Seven  Jumps 60 

Shoemakers'   Dance 27 

Shoemaker  and  Elves.  The 32 

Sheep,  Sheep,  Come  Home 17 

Simon    Says 76 

Sing-A-Song-A-Sixpence    62 

Slap  Jack 16 

Snail,    The 19 

Snowman,    The 14 

Soccer  Dodge  Ball 99 

Speilman,    The 62 

Square   Dance 103 

Squat    Tag 35 

Squirrel  and  Fox 17 

Squirrel  and  Nut 16 


Index 


125 


Page 

Squirrel  iu  Trees 16 

Stealing  Partners 93 

Stealing  Steps 56 

Stone    17 

Stride  Ball 87 

Swedish    Ring  Dance 44 

T 
Tag: 

Circle    Tag 76 

Initial  Tag 76 

Nose  and  Toe  Tag 98 

Partner    Tag 75 

Posture    Tag 67 

Squat    Tag 35 

Target   Throw 76 

Teacher  and  Class 67 

Telegram 77 

Tennis   Serve 116 

Thanksgiving  Pies 13 

Three    Deep 77 


Page 
Three    Dukes 37 

Throw,  Basketball,  distance 115 

Touch    Ball 77 

Twelve  O'clock  at  Night 35 

V 

Vineyard    Frolic 78 

Virginia    Reel 102 

A7is-a-Vis    77 

Volley    Ball 98 

Volley  Ball  Serve 115 

W 

Washing    Clothes 29 

Water  Sprite 18 

Weather-Vane    68 

Weekly    Program 8 

Y 
Yankee    Doodle 60 


UNIVERSITY  OF  N.C.  AT  CHAPEL  HILL 


00034036935 


FOR  USE  ONLY  IN 
THE  NORTH  CAROLINA  COLLEC 


Form  No.  A-368,  Rev.  8/95 


